1 //===--- ASTContext.cpp - Context to hold long-lived AST nodes ------------===//
2 //
3 //                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4 //
5 // This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6 // License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
7 //
8 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
9 //
10 //  This file implements the ASTContext interface.
11 //
12 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13 
14 #include "clang/AST/ASTContext.h"
15 #include "clang/AST/CharUnits.h"
16 #include "clang/AST/CommentCommandTraits.h"
17 #include "clang/AST/DeclCXX.h"
18 #include "clang/AST/DeclObjC.h"
19 #include "clang/AST/DeclTemplate.h"
20 #include "clang/AST/TypeLoc.h"
21 #include "clang/AST/Expr.h"
22 #include "clang/AST/ExprCXX.h"
23 #include "clang/AST/ExternalASTSource.h"
24 #include "clang/AST/ASTMutationListener.h"
25 #include "clang/AST/RecordLayout.h"
26 #include "clang/AST/Mangle.h"
27 #include "clang/Basic/Builtins.h"
28 #include "clang/Basic/SourceManager.h"
29 #include "clang/Basic/TargetInfo.h"
30 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallString.h"
31 #include "llvm/ADT/StringExtras.h"
32 #include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
33 #include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
34 #include "llvm/Support/Capacity.h"
35 #include "CXXABI.h"
36 #include <map>
37 
38 using namespace clang;
39 
40 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDefaultConstructors;
41 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDefaultConstructorsDeclared;
42 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyConstructors;
43 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyConstructorsDeclared;
44 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveConstructors;
45 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveConstructorsDeclared;
46 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperators;
47 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperatorsDeclared;
48 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperators;
49 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperatorsDeclared;
50 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDestructors;
51 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDestructorsDeclared;
52 
53 enum FloatingRank {
54   HalfRank, FloatRank, DoubleRank, LongDoubleRank
55 };
56 
57 RawComment *ASTContext::getRawCommentForDeclNoCache(const Decl *D) const {
58   if (!CommentsLoaded && ExternalSource) {
59     ExternalSource->ReadComments();
60     CommentsLoaded = true;
61   }
62 
63   assert(D);
64 
65   // User can not attach documentation to implicit declarations.
66   if (D->isImplicit())
67     return NULL;
68 
69   // User can not attach documentation to implicit instantiations.
70   // FIXME: all these implicit instantiations shoud be marked as implicit
71   // declarations and get caught by condition above.
72   if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) {
73     if (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
74       return NULL;
75   }
76 
77   if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) {
78     if (VD->isStaticDataMember() &&
79         VD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
80       return NULL;
81   }
82 
83   if (const CXXRecordDecl *CRD = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) {
84     if (CRD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
85       return NULL;
86   }
87 
88   if (const EnumDecl *ED = dyn_cast<EnumDecl>(D)) {
89     if (ED->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
90       return NULL;
91   }
92 
93   // TODO: handle comments for function parameters properly.
94   if (isa<ParmVarDecl>(D))
95     return NULL;
96 
97   // TODO: we could look up template parameter documentation in the template
98   // documentation.
99   if (isa<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(D) ||
100       isa<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(D) ||
101       isa<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(D))
102     return NULL;
103 
104   ArrayRef<RawComment *> RawComments = Comments.getComments();
105 
106   // If there are no comments anywhere, we won't find anything.
107   if (RawComments.empty())
108     return NULL;
109 
110   // Find declaration location.
111   // For Objective-C declarations we generally don't expect to have multiple
112   // declarators, thus use declaration starting location as the "declaration
113   // location".
114   // For all other declarations multiple declarators are used quite frequently,
115   // so we use the location of the identifier as the "declaration location".
116   SourceLocation DeclLoc;
117   if (isa<ObjCMethodDecl>(D) || isa<ObjCContainerDecl>(D) ||
118       isa<ObjCPropertyDecl>(D) ||
119       isa<RedeclarableTemplateDecl>(D) ||
120       isa<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(D))
121     DeclLoc = D->getLocStart();
122   else
123     DeclLoc = D->getLocation();
124 
125   // If the declaration doesn't map directly to a location in a file, we
126   // can't find the comment.
127   if (DeclLoc.isInvalid() || !DeclLoc.isFileID())
128     return NULL;
129 
130   // Find the comment that occurs just after this declaration.
131   ArrayRef<RawComment *>::iterator Comment;
132   {
133     // When searching for comments during parsing, the comment we are looking
134     // for is usually among the last two comments we parsed -- check them
135     // first.
136     RawComment CommentAtDeclLoc(SourceMgr, SourceRange(DeclLoc));
137     BeforeThanCompare<RawComment> Compare(SourceMgr);
138     ArrayRef<RawComment *>::iterator MaybeBeforeDecl = RawComments.end() - 1;
139     bool Found = Compare(*MaybeBeforeDecl, &CommentAtDeclLoc);
140     if (!Found && RawComments.size() >= 2) {
141       MaybeBeforeDecl--;
142       Found = Compare(*MaybeBeforeDecl, &CommentAtDeclLoc);
143     }
144 
145     if (Found) {
146       Comment = MaybeBeforeDecl + 1;
147       assert(Comment == std::lower_bound(RawComments.begin(), RawComments.end(),
148                                          &CommentAtDeclLoc, Compare));
149     } else {
150       // Slow path.
151       Comment = std::lower_bound(RawComments.begin(), RawComments.end(),
152                                  &CommentAtDeclLoc, Compare);
153     }
154   }
155 
156   // Decompose the location for the declaration and find the beginning of the
157   // file buffer.
158   std::pair<FileID, unsigned> DeclLocDecomp = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc(DeclLoc);
159 
160   // First check whether we have a trailing comment.
161   if (Comment != RawComments.end() &&
162       (*Comment)->isDocumentation() && (*Comment)->isTrailingComment() &&
163       (isa<FieldDecl>(D) || isa<EnumConstantDecl>(D) || isa<VarDecl>(D))) {
164     std::pair<FileID, unsigned> CommentBeginDecomp
165       = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc((*Comment)->getSourceRange().getBegin());
166     // Check that Doxygen trailing comment comes after the declaration, starts
167     // on the same line and in the same file as the declaration.
168     if (DeclLocDecomp.first == CommentBeginDecomp.first &&
169         SourceMgr.getLineNumber(DeclLocDecomp.first, DeclLocDecomp.second)
170           == SourceMgr.getLineNumber(CommentBeginDecomp.first,
171                                      CommentBeginDecomp.second)) {
172       return *Comment;
173     }
174   }
175 
176   // The comment just after the declaration was not a trailing comment.
177   // Let's look at the previous comment.
178   if (Comment == RawComments.begin())
179     return NULL;
180   --Comment;
181 
182   // Check that we actually have a non-member Doxygen comment.
183   if (!(*Comment)->isDocumentation() || (*Comment)->isTrailingComment())
184     return NULL;
185 
186   // Decompose the end of the comment.
187   std::pair<FileID, unsigned> CommentEndDecomp
188     = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc((*Comment)->getSourceRange().getEnd());
189 
190   // If the comment and the declaration aren't in the same file, then they
191   // aren't related.
192   if (DeclLocDecomp.first != CommentEndDecomp.first)
193     return NULL;
194 
195   // Get the corresponding buffer.
196   bool Invalid = false;
197   const char *Buffer = SourceMgr.getBufferData(DeclLocDecomp.first,
198                                                &Invalid).data();
199   if (Invalid)
200     return NULL;
201 
202   // Extract text between the comment and declaration.
203   StringRef Text(Buffer + CommentEndDecomp.second,
204                  DeclLocDecomp.second - CommentEndDecomp.second);
205 
206   // There should be no other declarations or preprocessor directives between
207   // comment and declaration.
208   if (Text.find_first_of(",;{}#@") != StringRef::npos)
209     return NULL;
210 
211   return *Comment;
212 }
213 
214 namespace {
215 /// If we have a 'templated' declaration for a template, adjust 'D' to
216 /// refer to the actual template.
217 const Decl *adjustDeclToTemplate(const Decl *D) {
218   if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) {
219     if (const FunctionTemplateDecl *FTD = FD->getDescribedFunctionTemplate())
220       D = FTD;
221   } else if (const CXXRecordDecl *RD = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) {
222     if (const ClassTemplateDecl *CTD = RD->getDescribedClassTemplate())
223       D = CTD;
224   }
225   // FIXME: Alias templates?
226   return D;
227 }
228 } // unnamed namespace
229 
230 const RawComment *ASTContext::getRawCommentForAnyRedecl(
231                                                 const Decl *D,
232                                                 const Decl **OriginalDecl) const {
233   D = adjustDeclToTemplate(D);
234 
235   // Check whether we have cached a comment for this declaration already.
236   {
237     llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, RawCommentAndCacheFlags>::iterator Pos =
238         RedeclComments.find(D);
239     if (Pos != RedeclComments.end()) {
240       const RawCommentAndCacheFlags &Raw = Pos->second;
241       if (Raw.getKind() != RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl) {
242         if (OriginalDecl)
243           *OriginalDecl = Raw.getOriginalDecl();
244         return Raw.getRaw();
245       }
246     }
247   }
248 
249   // Search for comments attached to declarations in the redeclaration chain.
250   const RawComment *RC = NULL;
251   const Decl *OriginalDeclForRC = NULL;
252   for (Decl::redecl_iterator I = D->redecls_begin(),
253                              E = D->redecls_end();
254        I != E; ++I) {
255     llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, RawCommentAndCacheFlags>::iterator Pos =
256         RedeclComments.find(*I);
257     if (Pos != RedeclComments.end()) {
258       const RawCommentAndCacheFlags &Raw = Pos->second;
259       if (Raw.getKind() != RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl) {
260         RC = Raw.getRaw();
261         OriginalDeclForRC = Raw.getOriginalDecl();
262         break;
263       }
264     } else {
265       RC = getRawCommentForDeclNoCache(*I);
266       OriginalDeclForRC = *I;
267       RawCommentAndCacheFlags Raw;
268       if (RC) {
269         Raw.setRaw(RC);
270         Raw.setKind(RawCommentAndCacheFlags::FromDecl);
271       } else
272         Raw.setKind(RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl);
273       Raw.setOriginalDecl(*I);
274       RedeclComments[*I] = Raw;
275       if (RC)
276         break;
277     }
278   }
279 
280   // If we found a comment, it should be a documentation comment.
281   assert(!RC || RC->isDocumentation());
282 
283   if (OriginalDecl)
284     *OriginalDecl = OriginalDeclForRC;
285 
286   // Update cache for every declaration in the redeclaration chain.
287   RawCommentAndCacheFlags Raw;
288   Raw.setRaw(RC);
289   Raw.setKind(RawCommentAndCacheFlags::FromRedecl);
290   Raw.setOriginalDecl(OriginalDeclForRC);
291 
292   for (Decl::redecl_iterator I = D->redecls_begin(),
293                              E = D->redecls_end();
294        I != E; ++I) {
295     RawCommentAndCacheFlags &R = RedeclComments[*I];
296     if (R.getKind() == RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl)
297       R = Raw;
298   }
299 
300   return RC;
301 }
302 
303 comments::FullComment *ASTContext::getCommentForDecl(const Decl *D) const {
304   D = adjustDeclToTemplate(D);
305   const Decl *Canonical = D->getCanonicalDecl();
306   llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, comments::FullComment *>::iterator Pos =
307       ParsedComments.find(Canonical);
308   if (Pos != ParsedComments.end())
309     return Pos->second;
310 
311   const Decl *OriginalDecl;
312   const RawComment *RC = getRawCommentForAnyRedecl(D, &OriginalDecl);
313   if (!RC)
314     return NULL;
315 
316   if (D != OriginalDecl)
317     return getCommentForDecl(OriginalDecl);
318 
319   comments::FullComment *FC = RC->parse(*this, D);
320   ParsedComments[Canonical] = FC;
321   return FC;
322 }
323 
324 void
325 ASTContext::CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm::Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID,
326                                                TemplateTemplateParmDecl *Parm) {
327   ID.AddInteger(Parm->getDepth());
328   ID.AddInteger(Parm->getPosition());
329   ID.AddBoolean(Parm->isParameterPack());
330 
331   TemplateParameterList *Params = Parm->getTemplateParameters();
332   ID.AddInteger(Params->size());
333   for (TemplateParameterList::const_iterator P = Params->begin(),
334                                           PEnd = Params->end();
335        P != PEnd; ++P) {
336     if (TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTP = dyn_cast<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(*P)) {
337       ID.AddInteger(0);
338       ID.AddBoolean(TTP->isParameterPack());
339       continue;
340     }
341 
342     if (NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *NTTP = dyn_cast<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(*P)) {
343       ID.AddInteger(1);
344       ID.AddBoolean(NTTP->isParameterPack());
345       ID.AddPointer(NTTP->getType().getCanonicalType().getAsOpaquePtr());
346       if (NTTP->isExpandedParameterPack()) {
347         ID.AddBoolean(true);
348         ID.AddInteger(NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes());
349         for (unsigned I = 0, N = NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes(); I != N; ++I) {
350           QualType T = NTTP->getExpansionType(I);
351           ID.AddPointer(T.getCanonicalType().getAsOpaquePtr());
352         }
353       } else
354         ID.AddBoolean(false);
355       continue;
356     }
357 
358     TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP = cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(*P);
359     ID.AddInteger(2);
360     Profile(ID, TTP);
361   }
362 }
363 
364 TemplateTemplateParmDecl *
365 ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(
366                                           TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP) const {
367   // Check if we already have a canonical template template parameter.
368   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
369   CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm::Profile(ID, TTP);
370   void *InsertPos = 0;
371   CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm *Canonical
372     = CanonTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
373   if (Canonical)
374     return Canonical->getParam();
375 
376   // Build a canonical template parameter list.
377   TemplateParameterList *Params = TTP->getTemplateParameters();
378   SmallVector<NamedDecl *, 4> CanonParams;
379   CanonParams.reserve(Params->size());
380   for (TemplateParameterList::const_iterator P = Params->begin(),
381                                           PEnd = Params->end();
382        P != PEnd; ++P) {
383     if (TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTP = dyn_cast<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(*P))
384       CanonParams.push_back(
385                   TemplateTypeParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
386                                                SourceLocation(),
387                                                SourceLocation(),
388                                                TTP->getDepth(),
389                                                TTP->getIndex(), 0, false,
390                                                TTP->isParameterPack()));
391     else if (NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *NTTP
392              = dyn_cast<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(*P)) {
393       QualType T = getCanonicalType(NTTP->getType());
394       TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T);
395       NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *Param;
396       if (NTTP->isExpandedParameterPack()) {
397         SmallVector<QualType, 2> ExpandedTypes;
398         SmallVector<TypeSourceInfo *, 2> ExpandedTInfos;
399         for (unsigned I = 0, N = NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes(); I != N; ++I) {
400           ExpandedTypes.push_back(getCanonicalType(NTTP->getExpansionType(I)));
401           ExpandedTInfos.push_back(
402                                 getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(ExpandedTypes.back()));
403         }
404 
405         Param = NonTypeTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
406                                                 SourceLocation(),
407                                                 SourceLocation(),
408                                                 NTTP->getDepth(),
409                                                 NTTP->getPosition(), 0,
410                                                 T,
411                                                 TInfo,
412                                                 ExpandedTypes.data(),
413                                                 ExpandedTypes.size(),
414                                                 ExpandedTInfos.data());
415       } else {
416         Param = NonTypeTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
417                                                 SourceLocation(),
418                                                 SourceLocation(),
419                                                 NTTP->getDepth(),
420                                                 NTTP->getPosition(), 0,
421                                                 T,
422                                                 NTTP->isParameterPack(),
423                                                 TInfo);
424       }
425       CanonParams.push_back(Param);
426 
427     } else
428       CanonParams.push_back(getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(
429                                            cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(*P)));
430   }
431 
432   TemplateTemplateParmDecl *CanonTTP
433     = TemplateTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
434                                        SourceLocation(), TTP->getDepth(),
435                                        TTP->getPosition(),
436                                        TTP->isParameterPack(),
437                                        0,
438                          TemplateParameterList::Create(*this, SourceLocation(),
439                                                        SourceLocation(),
440                                                        CanonParams.data(),
441                                                        CanonParams.size(),
442                                                        SourceLocation()));
443 
444   // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
445   Canonical = CanonTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
446   assert(Canonical == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!");
447   (void)Canonical;
448 
449   // Create the canonical template template parameter entry.
450   Canonical = new (*this) CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm(CanonTTP);
451   CanonTemplateTemplateParms.InsertNode(Canonical, InsertPos);
452   return CanonTTP;
453 }
454 
455 CXXABI *ASTContext::createCXXABI(const TargetInfo &T) {
456   if (!LangOpts.CPlusPlus) return 0;
457 
458   switch (T.getCXXABI()) {
459   case CXXABI_ARM:
460     return CreateARMCXXABI(*this);
461   case CXXABI_Itanium:
462     return CreateItaniumCXXABI(*this);
463   case CXXABI_Microsoft:
464     return CreateMicrosoftCXXABI(*this);
465   }
466   llvm_unreachable("Invalid CXXABI type!");
467 }
468 
469 static const LangAS::Map *getAddressSpaceMap(const TargetInfo &T,
470                                              const LangOptions &LOpts) {
471   if (LOpts.FakeAddressSpaceMap) {
472     // The fake address space map must have a distinct entry for each
473     // language-specific address space.
474     static const unsigned FakeAddrSpaceMap[] = {
475       1, // opencl_global
476       2, // opencl_local
477       3, // opencl_constant
478       4, // cuda_device
479       5, // cuda_constant
480       6  // cuda_shared
481     };
482     return &FakeAddrSpaceMap;
483   } else {
484     return &T.getAddressSpaceMap();
485   }
486 }
487 
488 ASTContext::ASTContext(LangOptions& LOpts, SourceManager &SM,
489                        const TargetInfo *t,
490                        IdentifierTable &idents, SelectorTable &sels,
491                        Builtin::Context &builtins,
492                        unsigned size_reserve,
493                        bool DelayInitialization)
494   : FunctionProtoTypes(this_()),
495     TemplateSpecializationTypes(this_()),
496     DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes(this_()),
497     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks(this_()),
498     GlobalNestedNameSpecifier(0),
499     Int128Decl(0), UInt128Decl(0),
500     BuiltinVaListDecl(0),
501     ObjCIdDecl(0), ObjCSelDecl(0), ObjCClassDecl(0), ObjCProtocolClassDecl(0),
502     CFConstantStringTypeDecl(0), ObjCInstanceTypeDecl(0),
503     FILEDecl(0),
504     jmp_bufDecl(0), sigjmp_bufDecl(0), ucontext_tDecl(0),
505     BlockDescriptorType(0), BlockDescriptorExtendedType(0),
506     cudaConfigureCallDecl(0),
507     NullTypeSourceInfo(QualType()),
508     FirstLocalImport(), LastLocalImport(),
509     SourceMgr(SM), LangOpts(LOpts),
510     AddrSpaceMap(0), Target(t), PrintingPolicy(LOpts),
511     Idents(idents), Selectors(sels),
512     BuiltinInfo(builtins),
513     DeclarationNames(*this),
514     ExternalSource(0), Listener(0),
515     Comments(SM), CommentsLoaded(false),
516     LastSDM(0, 0),
517     UniqueBlockByRefTypeID(0)
518 {
519   if (size_reserve > 0) Types.reserve(size_reserve);
520   TUDecl = TranslationUnitDecl::Create(*this);
521 
522   if (!DelayInitialization) {
523     assert(t && "No target supplied for ASTContext initialization");
524     InitBuiltinTypes(*t);
525   }
526 }
527 
528 ASTContext::~ASTContext() {
529   // Release the DenseMaps associated with DeclContext objects.
530   // FIXME: Is this the ideal solution?
531   ReleaseDeclContextMaps();
532 
533   // Call all of the deallocation functions.
534   for (unsigned I = 0, N = Deallocations.size(); I != N; ++I)
535     Deallocations[I].first(Deallocations[I].second);
536 
537   // ASTRecordLayout objects in ASTRecordLayouts must always be destroyed
538   // because they can contain DenseMaps.
539   for (llvm::DenseMap<const ObjCContainerDecl*,
540        const ASTRecordLayout*>::iterator
541        I = ObjCLayouts.begin(), E = ObjCLayouts.end(); I != E; )
542     // Increment in loop to prevent using deallocated memory.
543     if (ASTRecordLayout *R = const_cast<ASTRecordLayout*>((I++)->second))
544       R->Destroy(*this);
545 
546   for (llvm::DenseMap<const RecordDecl*, const ASTRecordLayout*>::iterator
547        I = ASTRecordLayouts.begin(), E = ASTRecordLayouts.end(); I != E; ) {
548     // Increment in loop to prevent using deallocated memory.
549     if (ASTRecordLayout *R = const_cast<ASTRecordLayout*>((I++)->second))
550       R->Destroy(*this);
551   }
552 
553   for (llvm::DenseMap<const Decl*, AttrVec*>::iterator A = DeclAttrs.begin(),
554                                                     AEnd = DeclAttrs.end();
555        A != AEnd; ++A)
556     A->second->~AttrVec();
557 }
558 
559 void ASTContext::AddDeallocation(void (*Callback)(void*), void *Data) {
560   Deallocations.push_back(std::make_pair(Callback, Data));
561 }
562 
563 void
564 ASTContext::setExternalSource(OwningPtr<ExternalASTSource> &Source) {
565   ExternalSource.reset(Source.take());
566 }
567 
568 void ASTContext::PrintStats() const {
569   llvm::errs() << "\n*** AST Context Stats:\n";
570   llvm::errs() << "  " << Types.size() << " types total.\n";
571 
572   unsigned counts[] = {
573 #define TYPE(Name, Parent) 0,
574 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Name, Parent)
575 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
576     0 // Extra
577   };
578 
579   for (unsigned i = 0, e = Types.size(); i != e; ++i) {
580     Type *T = Types[i];
581     counts[(unsigned)T->getTypeClass()]++;
582   }
583 
584   unsigned Idx = 0;
585   unsigned TotalBytes = 0;
586 #define TYPE(Name, Parent)                                              \
587   if (counts[Idx])                                                      \
588     llvm::errs() << "    " << counts[Idx] << " " << #Name               \
589                  << " types\n";                                         \
590   TotalBytes += counts[Idx] * sizeof(Name##Type);                       \
591   ++Idx;
592 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Name, Parent)
593 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
594 
595   llvm::errs() << "Total bytes = " << TotalBytes << "\n";
596 
597   // Implicit special member functions.
598   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitDefaultConstructorsDeclared << "/"
599                << NumImplicitDefaultConstructors
600                << " implicit default constructors created\n";
601   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitCopyConstructorsDeclared << "/"
602                << NumImplicitCopyConstructors
603                << " implicit copy constructors created\n";
604   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
605     llvm::errs() << NumImplicitMoveConstructorsDeclared << "/"
606                  << NumImplicitMoveConstructors
607                  << " implicit move constructors created\n";
608   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperatorsDeclared << "/"
609                << NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperators
610                << " implicit copy assignment operators created\n";
611   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
612     llvm::errs() << NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperatorsDeclared << "/"
613                  << NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperators
614                  << " implicit move assignment operators created\n";
615   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitDestructorsDeclared << "/"
616                << NumImplicitDestructors
617                << " implicit destructors created\n";
618 
619   if (ExternalSource.get()) {
620     llvm::errs() << "\n";
621     ExternalSource->PrintStats();
622   }
623 
624   BumpAlloc.PrintStats();
625 }
626 
627 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getInt128Decl() const {
628   if (!Int128Decl) {
629     TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(Int128Ty);
630     Int128Decl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
631                                      getTranslationUnitDecl(),
632                                      SourceLocation(),
633                                      SourceLocation(),
634                                      &Idents.get("__int128_t"),
635                                      TInfo);
636   }
637 
638   return Int128Decl;
639 }
640 
641 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getUInt128Decl() const {
642   if (!UInt128Decl) {
643     TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(UnsignedInt128Ty);
644     UInt128Decl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
645                                      getTranslationUnitDecl(),
646                                      SourceLocation(),
647                                      SourceLocation(),
648                                      &Idents.get("__uint128_t"),
649                                      TInfo);
650   }
651 
652   return UInt128Decl;
653 }
654 
655 void ASTContext::InitBuiltinType(CanQualType &R, BuiltinType::Kind K) {
656   BuiltinType *Ty = new (*this, TypeAlignment) BuiltinType(K);
657   R = CanQualType::CreateUnsafe(QualType(Ty, 0));
658   Types.push_back(Ty);
659 }
660 
661 void ASTContext::InitBuiltinTypes(const TargetInfo &Target) {
662   assert((!this->Target || this->Target == &Target) &&
663          "Incorrect target reinitialization");
664   assert(VoidTy.isNull() && "Context reinitialized?");
665 
666   this->Target = &Target;
667 
668   ABI.reset(createCXXABI(Target));
669   AddrSpaceMap = getAddressSpaceMap(Target, LangOpts);
670 
671   // C99 6.2.5p19.
672   InitBuiltinType(VoidTy,              BuiltinType::Void);
673 
674   // C99 6.2.5p2.
675   InitBuiltinType(BoolTy,              BuiltinType::Bool);
676   // C99 6.2.5p3.
677   if (LangOpts.CharIsSigned)
678     InitBuiltinType(CharTy,            BuiltinType::Char_S);
679   else
680     InitBuiltinType(CharTy,            BuiltinType::Char_U);
681   // C99 6.2.5p4.
682   InitBuiltinType(SignedCharTy,        BuiltinType::SChar);
683   InitBuiltinType(ShortTy,             BuiltinType::Short);
684   InitBuiltinType(IntTy,               BuiltinType::Int);
685   InitBuiltinType(LongTy,              BuiltinType::Long);
686   InitBuiltinType(LongLongTy,          BuiltinType::LongLong);
687 
688   // C99 6.2.5p6.
689   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedCharTy,      BuiltinType::UChar);
690   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedShortTy,     BuiltinType::UShort);
691   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedIntTy,       BuiltinType::UInt);
692   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedLongTy,      BuiltinType::ULong);
693   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedLongLongTy,  BuiltinType::ULongLong);
694 
695   // C99 6.2.5p10.
696   InitBuiltinType(FloatTy,             BuiltinType::Float);
697   InitBuiltinType(DoubleTy,            BuiltinType::Double);
698   InitBuiltinType(LongDoubleTy,        BuiltinType::LongDouble);
699 
700   // GNU extension, 128-bit integers.
701   InitBuiltinType(Int128Ty,            BuiltinType::Int128);
702   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedInt128Ty,    BuiltinType::UInt128);
703 
704   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) { // C++ 3.9.1p5
705     if (TargetInfo::isTypeSigned(Target.getWCharType()))
706       InitBuiltinType(WCharTy,           BuiltinType::WChar_S);
707     else  // -fshort-wchar makes wchar_t be unsigned.
708       InitBuiltinType(WCharTy,           BuiltinType::WChar_U);
709   } else // C99
710     WCharTy = getFromTargetType(Target.getWCharType());
711 
712   WIntTy = getFromTargetType(Target.getWIntType());
713 
714   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) // C++0x 3.9.1p5, extension for C++
715     InitBuiltinType(Char16Ty,           BuiltinType::Char16);
716   else // C99
717     Char16Ty = getFromTargetType(Target.getChar16Type());
718 
719   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) // C++0x 3.9.1p5, extension for C++
720     InitBuiltinType(Char32Ty,           BuiltinType::Char32);
721   else // C99
722     Char32Ty = getFromTargetType(Target.getChar32Type());
723 
724   // Placeholder type for type-dependent expressions whose type is
725   // completely unknown. No code should ever check a type against
726   // DependentTy and users should never see it; however, it is here to
727   // help diagnose failures to properly check for type-dependent
728   // expressions.
729   InitBuiltinType(DependentTy,         BuiltinType::Dependent);
730 
731   // Placeholder type for functions.
732   InitBuiltinType(OverloadTy,          BuiltinType::Overload);
733 
734   // Placeholder type for bound members.
735   InitBuiltinType(BoundMemberTy,       BuiltinType::BoundMember);
736 
737   // Placeholder type for pseudo-objects.
738   InitBuiltinType(PseudoObjectTy,      BuiltinType::PseudoObject);
739 
740   // "any" type; useful for debugger-like clients.
741   InitBuiltinType(UnknownAnyTy,        BuiltinType::UnknownAny);
742 
743   // Placeholder type for unbridged ARC casts.
744   InitBuiltinType(ARCUnbridgedCastTy,  BuiltinType::ARCUnbridgedCast);
745 
746   // C99 6.2.5p11.
747   FloatComplexTy      = getComplexType(FloatTy);
748   DoubleComplexTy     = getComplexType(DoubleTy);
749   LongDoubleComplexTy = getComplexType(LongDoubleTy);
750 
751   // Builtin types for 'id', 'Class', and 'SEL'.
752   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinIdTy, BuiltinType::ObjCId);
753   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinClassTy, BuiltinType::ObjCClass);
754   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinSelTy, BuiltinType::ObjCSel);
755 
756   // Builtin type for __objc_yes and __objc_no
757   ObjCBuiltinBoolTy = (Target.useSignedCharForObjCBool() ?
758                        SignedCharTy : BoolTy);
759 
760   ObjCConstantStringType = QualType();
761 
762   // void * type
763   VoidPtrTy = getPointerType(VoidTy);
764 
765   // nullptr type (C++0x 2.14.7)
766   InitBuiltinType(NullPtrTy,           BuiltinType::NullPtr);
767 
768   // half type (OpenCL 6.1.1.1) / ARM NEON __fp16
769   InitBuiltinType(HalfTy, BuiltinType::Half);
770 
771   // Builtin type used to help define __builtin_va_list.
772   VaListTagTy = QualType();
773 }
774 
775 DiagnosticsEngine &ASTContext::getDiagnostics() const {
776   return SourceMgr.getDiagnostics();
777 }
778 
779 AttrVec& ASTContext::getDeclAttrs(const Decl *D) {
780   AttrVec *&Result = DeclAttrs[D];
781   if (!Result) {
782     void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(AttrVec));
783     Result = new (Mem) AttrVec;
784   }
785 
786   return *Result;
787 }
788 
789 /// \brief Erase the attributes corresponding to the given declaration.
790 void ASTContext::eraseDeclAttrs(const Decl *D) {
791   llvm::DenseMap<const Decl*, AttrVec*>::iterator Pos = DeclAttrs.find(D);
792   if (Pos != DeclAttrs.end()) {
793     Pos->second->~AttrVec();
794     DeclAttrs.erase(Pos);
795   }
796 }
797 
798 MemberSpecializationInfo *
799 ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember(const VarDecl *Var) {
800   assert(Var->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member");
801   llvm::DenseMap<const VarDecl *, MemberSpecializationInfo *>::iterator Pos
802     = InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember.find(Var);
803   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember.end())
804     return 0;
805 
806   return Pos->second;
807 }
808 
809 void
810 ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember(VarDecl *Inst, VarDecl *Tmpl,
811                                                 TemplateSpecializationKind TSK,
812                                           SourceLocation PointOfInstantiation) {
813   assert(Inst->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member");
814   assert(Tmpl->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member");
815   assert(!InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember[Inst] &&
816          "Already noted what static data member was instantiated from");
817   InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember[Inst]
818     = new (*this) MemberSpecializationInfo(Tmpl, TSK, PointOfInstantiation);
819 }
820 
821 FunctionDecl *ASTContext::getClassScopeSpecializationPattern(
822                                                      const FunctionDecl *FD){
823   assert(FD && "Specialization is 0");
824   llvm::DenseMap<const FunctionDecl*, FunctionDecl *>::const_iterator Pos
825     = ClassScopeSpecializationPattern.find(FD);
826   if (Pos == ClassScopeSpecializationPattern.end())
827     return 0;
828 
829   return Pos->second;
830 }
831 
832 void ASTContext::setClassScopeSpecializationPattern(FunctionDecl *FD,
833                                         FunctionDecl *Pattern) {
834   assert(FD && "Specialization is 0");
835   assert(Pattern && "Class scope specialization pattern is 0");
836   ClassScopeSpecializationPattern[FD] = Pattern;
837 }
838 
839 NamedDecl *
840 ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUsingDecl(UsingDecl *UUD) {
841   llvm::DenseMap<UsingDecl *, NamedDecl *>::const_iterator Pos
842     = InstantiatedFromUsingDecl.find(UUD);
843   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUsingDecl.end())
844     return 0;
845 
846   return Pos->second;
847 }
848 
849 void
850 ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUsingDecl(UsingDecl *Inst, NamedDecl *Pattern) {
851   assert((isa<UsingDecl>(Pattern) ||
852           isa<UnresolvedUsingValueDecl>(Pattern) ||
853           isa<UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl>(Pattern)) &&
854          "pattern decl is not a using decl");
855   assert(!InstantiatedFromUsingDecl[Inst] && "pattern already exists");
856   InstantiatedFromUsingDecl[Inst] = Pattern;
857 }
858 
859 UsingShadowDecl *
860 ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl(UsingShadowDecl *Inst) {
861   llvm::DenseMap<UsingShadowDecl*, UsingShadowDecl*>::const_iterator Pos
862     = InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl.find(Inst);
863   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl.end())
864     return 0;
865 
866   return Pos->second;
867 }
868 
869 void
870 ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl(UsingShadowDecl *Inst,
871                                                UsingShadowDecl *Pattern) {
872   assert(!InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl[Inst] && "pattern already exists");
873   InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl[Inst] = Pattern;
874 }
875 
876 FieldDecl *ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl(FieldDecl *Field) {
877   llvm::DenseMap<FieldDecl *, FieldDecl *>::iterator Pos
878     = InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl.find(Field);
879   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl.end())
880     return 0;
881 
882   return Pos->second;
883 }
884 
885 void ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl(FieldDecl *Inst,
886                                                      FieldDecl *Tmpl) {
887   assert(!Inst->getDeclName() && "Instantiated field decl is not unnamed");
888   assert(!Tmpl->getDeclName() && "Template field decl is not unnamed");
889   assert(!InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl[Inst] &&
890          "Already noted what unnamed field was instantiated from");
891 
892   InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl[Inst] = Tmpl;
893 }
894 
895 bool ASTContext::ZeroBitfieldFollowsNonBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
896                                     const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
897   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && !LastFD->isBitField() &&
898           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this) == 0);
899 }
900 
901 bool ASTContext::ZeroBitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
902                                              const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
903   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && LastFD->isBitField() &&
904           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this) == 0 &&
905           LastFD->getBitWidthValue(*this) != 0);
906 }
907 
908 bool ASTContext::BitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
909                                          const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
910   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && LastFD->isBitField() &&
911           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this) &&
912           LastFD->getBitWidthValue(*this));
913 }
914 
915 bool ASTContext::NonBitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
916                                          const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
917   return (!FD->isBitField() && LastFD && LastFD->isBitField() &&
918           LastFD->getBitWidthValue(*this));
919 }
920 
921 bool ASTContext::BitfieldFollowsNonBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
922                                              const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
923   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && !LastFD->isBitField() &&
924           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this));
925 }
926 
927 ASTContext::overridden_cxx_method_iterator
928 ASTContext::overridden_methods_begin(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const {
929   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos
930     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method);
931   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end())
932     return 0;
933 
934   return Pos->second.begin();
935 }
936 
937 ASTContext::overridden_cxx_method_iterator
938 ASTContext::overridden_methods_end(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const {
939   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos
940     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method);
941   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end())
942     return 0;
943 
944   return Pos->second.end();
945 }
946 
947 unsigned
948 ASTContext::overridden_methods_size(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const {
949   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos
950     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method);
951   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end())
952     return 0;
953 
954   return Pos->second.size();
955 }
956 
957 void ASTContext::addOverriddenMethod(const CXXMethodDecl *Method,
958                                      const CXXMethodDecl *Overridden) {
959   OverriddenMethods[Method].push_back(Overridden);
960 }
961 
962 void ASTContext::addedLocalImportDecl(ImportDecl *Import) {
963   assert(!Import->NextLocalImport && "Import declaration already in the chain");
964   assert(!Import->isFromASTFile() && "Non-local import declaration");
965   if (!FirstLocalImport) {
966     FirstLocalImport = Import;
967     LastLocalImport = Import;
968     return;
969   }
970 
971   LastLocalImport->NextLocalImport = Import;
972   LastLocalImport = Import;
973 }
974 
975 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
976 //                         Type Sizing and Analysis
977 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
978 
979 /// getFloatTypeSemantics - Return the APFloat 'semantics' for the specified
980 /// scalar floating point type.
981 const llvm::fltSemantics &ASTContext::getFloatTypeSemantics(QualType T) const {
982   const BuiltinType *BT = T->getAs<BuiltinType>();
983   assert(BT && "Not a floating point type!");
984   switch (BT->getKind()) {
985   default: llvm_unreachable("Not a floating point type!");
986   case BuiltinType::Half:       return Target->getHalfFormat();
987   case BuiltinType::Float:      return Target->getFloatFormat();
988   case BuiltinType::Double:     return Target->getDoubleFormat();
989   case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return Target->getLongDoubleFormat();
990   }
991 }
992 
993 /// getDeclAlign - Return a conservative estimate of the alignment of the
994 /// specified decl.  Note that bitfields do not have a valid alignment, so
995 /// this method will assert on them.
996 /// If @p RefAsPointee, references are treated like their underlying type
997 /// (for alignof), else they're treated like pointers (for CodeGen).
998 CharUnits ASTContext::getDeclAlign(const Decl *D, bool RefAsPointee) const {
999   unsigned Align = Target->getCharWidth();
1000 
1001   bool UseAlignAttrOnly = false;
1002   if (unsigned AlignFromAttr = D->getMaxAlignment()) {
1003     Align = AlignFromAttr;
1004 
1005     // __attribute__((aligned)) can increase or decrease alignment
1006     // *except* on a struct or struct member, where it only increases
1007     // alignment unless 'packed' is also specified.
1008     //
1009     // It is an error for alignas to decrease alignment, so we can
1010     // ignore that possibility;  Sema should diagnose it.
1011     if (isa<FieldDecl>(D)) {
1012       UseAlignAttrOnly = D->hasAttr<PackedAttr>() ||
1013         cast<FieldDecl>(D)->getParent()->hasAttr<PackedAttr>();
1014     } else {
1015       UseAlignAttrOnly = true;
1016     }
1017   }
1018   else if (isa<FieldDecl>(D))
1019       UseAlignAttrOnly =
1020         D->hasAttr<PackedAttr>() ||
1021         cast<FieldDecl>(D)->getParent()->hasAttr<PackedAttr>();
1022 
1023   // If we're using the align attribute only, just ignore everything
1024   // else about the declaration and its type.
1025   if (UseAlignAttrOnly) {
1026     // do nothing
1027 
1028   } else if (const ValueDecl *VD = dyn_cast<ValueDecl>(D)) {
1029     QualType T = VD->getType();
1030     if (const ReferenceType* RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>()) {
1031       if (RefAsPointee)
1032         T = RT->getPointeeType();
1033       else
1034         T = getPointerType(RT->getPointeeType());
1035     }
1036     if (!T->isIncompleteType() && !T->isFunctionType()) {
1037       // Adjust alignments of declarations with array type by the
1038       // large-array alignment on the target.
1039       unsigned MinWidth = Target->getLargeArrayMinWidth();
1040       const ArrayType *arrayType;
1041       if (MinWidth && (arrayType = getAsArrayType(T))) {
1042         if (isa<VariableArrayType>(arrayType))
1043           Align = std::max(Align, Target->getLargeArrayAlign());
1044         else if (isa<ConstantArrayType>(arrayType) &&
1045                  MinWidth <= getTypeSize(cast<ConstantArrayType>(arrayType)))
1046           Align = std::max(Align, Target->getLargeArrayAlign());
1047 
1048         // Walk through any array types while we're at it.
1049         T = getBaseElementType(arrayType);
1050       }
1051       Align = std::max(Align, getPreferredTypeAlign(T.getTypePtr()));
1052     }
1053 
1054     // Fields can be subject to extra alignment constraints, like if
1055     // the field is packed, the struct is packed, or the struct has a
1056     // a max-field-alignment constraint (#pragma pack).  So calculate
1057     // the actual alignment of the field within the struct, and then
1058     // (as we're expected to) constrain that by the alignment of the type.
1059     if (const FieldDecl *field = dyn_cast<FieldDecl>(VD)) {
1060       // So calculate the alignment of the field.
1061       const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(field->getParent());
1062 
1063       // Start with the record's overall alignment.
1064       unsigned fieldAlign = toBits(layout.getAlignment());
1065 
1066       // Use the GCD of that and the offset within the record.
1067       uint64_t offset = layout.getFieldOffset(field->getFieldIndex());
1068       if (offset > 0) {
1069         // Alignment is always a power of 2, so the GCD will be a power of 2,
1070         // which means we get to do this crazy thing instead of Euclid's.
1071         uint64_t lowBitOfOffset = offset & (~offset + 1);
1072         if (lowBitOfOffset < fieldAlign)
1073           fieldAlign = static_cast<unsigned>(lowBitOfOffset);
1074       }
1075 
1076       Align = std::min(Align, fieldAlign);
1077     }
1078   }
1079 
1080   return toCharUnitsFromBits(Align);
1081 }
1082 
1083 // getTypeInfoDataSizeInChars - Return the size of a type, in
1084 // chars. If the type is a record, its data size is returned.  This is
1085 // the size of the memcpy that's performed when assigning this type
1086 // using a trivial copy/move assignment operator.
1087 std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits>
1088 ASTContext::getTypeInfoDataSizeInChars(QualType T) const {
1089   std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits> sizeAndAlign = getTypeInfoInChars(T);
1090 
1091   // In C++, objects can sometimes be allocated into the tail padding
1092   // of a base-class subobject.  We decide whether that's possible
1093   // during class layout, so here we can just trust the layout results.
1094   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) {
1095     if (const RecordType *RT = T->getAs<RecordType>()) {
1096       const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(RT->getDecl());
1097       sizeAndAlign.first = layout.getDataSize();
1098     }
1099   }
1100 
1101   return sizeAndAlign;
1102 }
1103 
1104 std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits>
1105 ASTContext::getTypeInfoInChars(const Type *T) const {
1106   std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info = getTypeInfo(T);
1107   return std::make_pair(toCharUnitsFromBits(Info.first),
1108                         toCharUnitsFromBits(Info.second));
1109 }
1110 
1111 std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits>
1112 ASTContext::getTypeInfoInChars(QualType T) const {
1113   return getTypeInfoInChars(T.getTypePtr());
1114 }
1115 
1116 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> ASTContext::getTypeInfo(const Type *T) const {
1117   TypeInfoMap::iterator it = MemoizedTypeInfo.find(T);
1118   if (it != MemoizedTypeInfo.end())
1119     return it->second;
1120 
1121   std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info = getTypeInfoImpl(T);
1122   MemoizedTypeInfo.insert(std::make_pair(T, Info));
1123   return Info;
1124 }
1125 
1126 /// getTypeInfoImpl - Return the size of the specified type, in bits.  This
1127 /// method does not work on incomplete types.
1128 ///
1129 /// FIXME: Pointers into different addr spaces could have different sizes and
1130 /// alignment requirements: getPointerInfo should take an AddrSpace, this
1131 /// should take a QualType, &c.
1132 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned>
1133 ASTContext::getTypeInfoImpl(const Type *T) const {
1134   uint64_t Width=0;
1135   unsigned Align=8;
1136   switch (T->getTypeClass()) {
1137 #define TYPE(Class, Base)
1138 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base)
1139 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base)
1140 #define DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
1141 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
1142     llvm_unreachable("Should not see dependent types");
1143 
1144   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
1145   case Type::FunctionProto:
1146     // GCC extension: alignof(function) = 32 bits
1147     Width = 0;
1148     Align = 32;
1149     break;
1150 
1151   case Type::IncompleteArray:
1152   case Type::VariableArray:
1153     Width = 0;
1154     Align = getTypeAlign(cast<ArrayType>(T)->getElementType());
1155     break;
1156 
1157   case Type::ConstantArray: {
1158     const ConstantArrayType *CAT = cast<ConstantArrayType>(T);
1159 
1160     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo = getTypeInfo(CAT->getElementType());
1161     uint64_t Size = CAT->getSize().getZExtValue();
1162     assert((Size == 0 || EltInfo.first <= (uint64_t)(-1)/Size) &&
1163            "Overflow in array type bit size evaluation");
1164     Width = EltInfo.first*Size;
1165     Align = EltInfo.second;
1166     Width = llvm::RoundUpToAlignment(Width, Align);
1167     break;
1168   }
1169   case Type::ExtVector:
1170   case Type::Vector: {
1171     const VectorType *VT = cast<VectorType>(T);
1172     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo = getTypeInfo(VT->getElementType());
1173     Width = EltInfo.first*VT->getNumElements();
1174     Align = Width;
1175     // If the alignment is not a power of 2, round up to the next power of 2.
1176     // This happens for non-power-of-2 length vectors.
1177     if (Align & (Align-1)) {
1178       Align = llvm::NextPowerOf2(Align);
1179       Width = llvm::RoundUpToAlignment(Width, Align);
1180     }
1181     // Adjust the alignment based on the target max.
1182     uint64_t TargetVectorAlign = Target->getMaxVectorAlign();
1183     if (TargetVectorAlign && TargetVectorAlign < Align)
1184       Align = TargetVectorAlign;
1185     break;
1186   }
1187 
1188   case Type::Builtin:
1189     switch (cast<BuiltinType>(T)->getKind()) {
1190     default: llvm_unreachable("Unknown builtin type!");
1191     case BuiltinType::Void:
1192       // GCC extension: alignof(void) = 8 bits.
1193       Width = 0;
1194       Align = 8;
1195       break;
1196 
1197     case BuiltinType::Bool:
1198       Width = Target->getBoolWidth();
1199       Align = Target->getBoolAlign();
1200       break;
1201     case BuiltinType::Char_S:
1202     case BuiltinType::Char_U:
1203     case BuiltinType::UChar:
1204     case BuiltinType::SChar:
1205       Width = Target->getCharWidth();
1206       Align = Target->getCharAlign();
1207       break;
1208     case BuiltinType::WChar_S:
1209     case BuiltinType::WChar_U:
1210       Width = Target->getWCharWidth();
1211       Align = Target->getWCharAlign();
1212       break;
1213     case BuiltinType::Char16:
1214       Width = Target->getChar16Width();
1215       Align = Target->getChar16Align();
1216       break;
1217     case BuiltinType::Char32:
1218       Width = Target->getChar32Width();
1219       Align = Target->getChar32Align();
1220       break;
1221     case BuiltinType::UShort:
1222     case BuiltinType::Short:
1223       Width = Target->getShortWidth();
1224       Align = Target->getShortAlign();
1225       break;
1226     case BuiltinType::UInt:
1227     case BuiltinType::Int:
1228       Width = Target->getIntWidth();
1229       Align = Target->getIntAlign();
1230       break;
1231     case BuiltinType::ULong:
1232     case BuiltinType::Long:
1233       Width = Target->getLongWidth();
1234       Align = Target->getLongAlign();
1235       break;
1236     case BuiltinType::ULongLong:
1237     case BuiltinType::LongLong:
1238       Width = Target->getLongLongWidth();
1239       Align = Target->getLongLongAlign();
1240       break;
1241     case BuiltinType::Int128:
1242     case BuiltinType::UInt128:
1243       Width = 128;
1244       Align = 128; // int128_t is 128-bit aligned on all targets.
1245       break;
1246     case BuiltinType::Half:
1247       Width = Target->getHalfWidth();
1248       Align = Target->getHalfAlign();
1249       break;
1250     case BuiltinType::Float:
1251       Width = Target->getFloatWidth();
1252       Align = Target->getFloatAlign();
1253       break;
1254     case BuiltinType::Double:
1255       Width = Target->getDoubleWidth();
1256       Align = Target->getDoubleAlign();
1257       break;
1258     case BuiltinType::LongDouble:
1259       Width = Target->getLongDoubleWidth();
1260       Align = Target->getLongDoubleAlign();
1261       break;
1262     case BuiltinType::NullPtr:
1263       Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0); // C++ 3.9.1p11: sizeof(nullptr_t)
1264       Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0); //   == sizeof(void*)
1265       break;
1266     case BuiltinType::ObjCId:
1267     case BuiltinType::ObjCClass:
1268     case BuiltinType::ObjCSel:
1269       Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0);
1270       Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0);
1271       break;
1272     }
1273     break;
1274   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer:
1275     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0);
1276     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0);
1277     break;
1278   case Type::BlockPointer: {
1279     unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace(
1280         cast<BlockPointerType>(T)->getPointeeType());
1281     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS);
1282     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS);
1283     break;
1284   }
1285   case Type::LValueReference:
1286   case Type::RValueReference: {
1287     // alignof and sizeof should never enter this code path here, so we go
1288     // the pointer route.
1289     unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace(
1290         cast<ReferenceType>(T)->getPointeeType());
1291     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS);
1292     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS);
1293     break;
1294   }
1295   case Type::Pointer: {
1296     unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace(cast<PointerType>(T)->getPointeeType());
1297     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS);
1298     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS);
1299     break;
1300   }
1301   case Type::MemberPointer: {
1302     const MemberPointerType *MPT = cast<MemberPointerType>(T);
1303     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> PtrDiffInfo =
1304       getTypeInfo(getPointerDiffType());
1305     Width = PtrDiffInfo.first * ABI->getMemberPointerSize(MPT);
1306     Align = PtrDiffInfo.second;
1307     break;
1308   }
1309   case Type::Complex: {
1310     // Complex types have the same alignment as their elements, but twice the
1311     // size.
1312     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo =
1313       getTypeInfo(cast<ComplexType>(T)->getElementType());
1314     Width = EltInfo.first*2;
1315     Align = EltInfo.second;
1316     break;
1317   }
1318   case Type::ObjCObject:
1319     return getTypeInfo(cast<ObjCObjectType>(T)->getBaseType().getTypePtr());
1320   case Type::ObjCInterface: {
1321     const ObjCInterfaceType *ObjCI = cast<ObjCInterfaceType>(T);
1322     const ASTRecordLayout &Layout = getASTObjCInterfaceLayout(ObjCI->getDecl());
1323     Width = toBits(Layout.getSize());
1324     Align = toBits(Layout.getAlignment());
1325     break;
1326   }
1327   case Type::Record:
1328   case Type::Enum: {
1329     const TagType *TT = cast<TagType>(T);
1330 
1331     if (TT->getDecl()->isInvalidDecl()) {
1332       Width = 8;
1333       Align = 8;
1334       break;
1335     }
1336 
1337     if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(TT))
1338       return getTypeInfo(ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType());
1339 
1340     const RecordType *RT = cast<RecordType>(TT);
1341     const ASTRecordLayout &Layout = getASTRecordLayout(RT->getDecl());
1342     Width = toBits(Layout.getSize());
1343     Align = toBits(Layout.getAlignment());
1344     break;
1345   }
1346 
1347   case Type::SubstTemplateTypeParm:
1348     return getTypeInfo(cast<SubstTemplateTypeParmType>(T)->
1349                        getReplacementType().getTypePtr());
1350 
1351   case Type::Auto: {
1352     const AutoType *A = cast<AutoType>(T);
1353     assert(A->isDeduced() && "Cannot request the size of a dependent type");
1354     return getTypeInfo(A->getDeducedType().getTypePtr());
1355   }
1356 
1357   case Type::Paren:
1358     return getTypeInfo(cast<ParenType>(T)->getInnerType().getTypePtr());
1359 
1360   case Type::Typedef: {
1361     const TypedefNameDecl *Typedef = cast<TypedefType>(T)->getDecl();
1362     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info
1363       = getTypeInfo(Typedef->getUnderlyingType().getTypePtr());
1364     // If the typedef has an aligned attribute on it, it overrides any computed
1365     // alignment we have.  This violates the GCC documentation (which says that
1366     // attribute(aligned) can only round up) but matches its implementation.
1367     if (unsigned AttrAlign = Typedef->getMaxAlignment())
1368       Align = AttrAlign;
1369     else
1370       Align = Info.second;
1371     Width = Info.first;
1372     break;
1373   }
1374 
1375   case Type::TypeOfExpr:
1376     return getTypeInfo(cast<TypeOfExprType>(T)->getUnderlyingExpr()->getType()
1377                          .getTypePtr());
1378 
1379   case Type::TypeOf:
1380     return getTypeInfo(cast<TypeOfType>(T)->getUnderlyingType().getTypePtr());
1381 
1382   case Type::Decltype:
1383     return getTypeInfo(cast<DecltypeType>(T)->getUnderlyingExpr()->getType()
1384                         .getTypePtr());
1385 
1386   case Type::UnaryTransform:
1387     return getTypeInfo(cast<UnaryTransformType>(T)->getUnderlyingType());
1388 
1389   case Type::Elaborated:
1390     return getTypeInfo(cast<ElaboratedType>(T)->getNamedType().getTypePtr());
1391 
1392   case Type::Attributed:
1393     return getTypeInfo(
1394                   cast<AttributedType>(T)->getEquivalentType().getTypePtr());
1395 
1396   case Type::TemplateSpecialization: {
1397     assert(getCanonicalType(T) != T &&
1398            "Cannot request the size of a dependent type");
1399     const TemplateSpecializationType *TST = cast<TemplateSpecializationType>(T);
1400     // A type alias template specialization may refer to a typedef with the
1401     // aligned attribute on it.
1402     if (TST->isTypeAlias())
1403       return getTypeInfo(TST->getAliasedType().getTypePtr());
1404     else
1405       return getTypeInfo(getCanonicalType(T));
1406   }
1407 
1408   case Type::Atomic: {
1409     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info
1410       = getTypeInfo(cast<AtomicType>(T)->getValueType());
1411     Width = Info.first;
1412     Align = Info.second;
1413     if (Width != 0 && Width <= Target->getMaxAtomicPromoteWidth() &&
1414         llvm::isPowerOf2_64(Width)) {
1415       // We can potentially perform lock-free atomic operations for this
1416       // type; promote the alignment appropriately.
1417       // FIXME: We could potentially promote the width here as well...
1418       // is that worthwhile?  (Non-struct atomic types generally have
1419       // power-of-two size anyway, but structs might not.  Requires a bit
1420       // of implementation work to make sure we zero out the extra bits.)
1421       Align = static_cast<unsigned>(Width);
1422     }
1423   }
1424 
1425   }
1426 
1427   assert(llvm::isPowerOf2_32(Align) && "Alignment must be power of 2");
1428   return std::make_pair(Width, Align);
1429 }
1430 
1431 /// toCharUnitsFromBits - Convert a size in bits to a size in characters.
1432 CharUnits ASTContext::toCharUnitsFromBits(int64_t BitSize) const {
1433   return CharUnits::fromQuantity(BitSize / getCharWidth());
1434 }
1435 
1436 /// toBits - Convert a size in characters to a size in characters.
1437 int64_t ASTContext::toBits(CharUnits CharSize) const {
1438   return CharSize.getQuantity() * getCharWidth();
1439 }
1440 
1441 /// getTypeSizeInChars - Return the size of the specified type, in characters.
1442 /// This method does not work on incomplete types.
1443 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeSizeInChars(QualType T) const {
1444   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeSize(T));
1445 }
1446 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeSizeInChars(const Type *T) const {
1447   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeSize(T));
1448 }
1449 
1450 /// getTypeAlignInChars - Return the ABI-specified alignment of a type, in
1451 /// characters. This method does not work on incomplete types.
1452 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeAlignInChars(QualType T) const {
1453   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeAlign(T));
1454 }
1455 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeAlignInChars(const Type *T) const {
1456   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeAlign(T));
1457 }
1458 
1459 /// getPreferredTypeAlign - Return the "preferred" alignment of the specified
1460 /// type for the current target in bits.  This can be different than the ABI
1461 /// alignment in cases where it is beneficial for performance to overalign
1462 /// a data type.
1463 unsigned ASTContext::getPreferredTypeAlign(const Type *T) const {
1464   unsigned ABIAlign = getTypeAlign(T);
1465 
1466   // Double and long long should be naturally aligned if possible.
1467   if (const ComplexType* CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>())
1468     T = CT->getElementType().getTypePtr();
1469   if (T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::Double) ||
1470       T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::LongLong) ||
1471       T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::ULongLong))
1472     return std::max(ABIAlign, (unsigned)getTypeSize(T));
1473 
1474   return ABIAlign;
1475 }
1476 
1477 /// DeepCollectObjCIvars -
1478 /// This routine first collects all declared, but not synthesized, ivars in
1479 /// super class and then collects all ivars, including those synthesized for
1480 /// current class. This routine is used for implementation of current class
1481 /// when all ivars, declared and synthesized are known.
1482 ///
1483 void ASTContext::DeepCollectObjCIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI,
1484                                       bool leafClass,
1485                             SmallVectorImpl<const ObjCIvarDecl*> &Ivars) const {
1486   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *SuperClass = OI->getSuperClass())
1487     DeepCollectObjCIvars(SuperClass, false, Ivars);
1488   if (!leafClass) {
1489     for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::ivar_iterator I = OI->ivar_begin(),
1490          E = OI->ivar_end(); I != E; ++I)
1491       Ivars.push_back(*I);
1492   } else {
1493     ObjCInterfaceDecl *IDecl = const_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl *>(OI);
1494     for (const ObjCIvarDecl *Iv = IDecl->all_declared_ivar_begin(); Iv;
1495          Iv= Iv->getNextIvar())
1496       Ivars.push_back(Iv);
1497   }
1498 }
1499 
1500 /// CollectInheritedProtocols - Collect all protocols in current class and
1501 /// those inherited by it.
1502 void ASTContext::CollectInheritedProtocols(const Decl *CDecl,
1503                           llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*, 8> &Protocols) {
1504   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI = dyn_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl>(CDecl)) {
1505     // We can use protocol_iterator here instead of
1506     // all_referenced_protocol_iterator since we are walking all categories.
1507     for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::all_protocol_iterator P = OI->all_referenced_protocol_begin(),
1508          PE = OI->all_referenced_protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1509       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P);
1510       Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl());
1511       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(),
1512            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1513         Protocols.insert((*P)->getCanonicalDecl());
1514         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols);
1515       }
1516     }
1517 
1518     // Categories of this Interface.
1519     for (const ObjCCategoryDecl *CDeclChain = OI->getCategoryList();
1520          CDeclChain; CDeclChain = CDeclChain->getNextClassCategory())
1521       CollectInheritedProtocols(CDeclChain, Protocols);
1522     if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *SD = OI->getSuperClass())
1523       while (SD) {
1524         CollectInheritedProtocols(SD, Protocols);
1525         SD = SD->getSuperClass();
1526       }
1527   } else if (const ObjCCategoryDecl *OC = dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryDecl>(CDecl)) {
1528     for (ObjCCategoryDecl::protocol_iterator P = OC->protocol_begin(),
1529          PE = OC->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1530       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P);
1531       Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl());
1532       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(),
1533            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P)
1534         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols);
1535     }
1536   } else if (const ObjCProtocolDecl *OP = dyn_cast<ObjCProtocolDecl>(CDecl)) {
1537     for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = OP->protocol_begin(),
1538          PE = OP->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1539       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P);
1540       Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl());
1541       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(),
1542            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P)
1543         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols);
1544     }
1545   }
1546 }
1547 
1548 unsigned ASTContext::CountNonClassIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI) const {
1549   unsigned count = 0;
1550   // Count ivars declared in class extension.
1551   for (const ObjCCategoryDecl *CDecl = OI->getFirstClassExtension(); CDecl;
1552        CDecl = CDecl->getNextClassExtension())
1553     count += CDecl->ivar_size();
1554 
1555   // Count ivar defined in this class's implementation.  This
1556   // includes synthesized ivars.
1557   if (ObjCImplementationDecl *ImplDecl = OI->getImplementation())
1558     count += ImplDecl->ivar_size();
1559 
1560   return count;
1561 }
1562 
1563 bool ASTContext::isSentinelNullExpr(const Expr *E) {
1564   if (!E)
1565     return false;
1566 
1567   // nullptr_t is always treated as null.
1568   if (E->getType()->isNullPtrType()) return true;
1569 
1570   if (E->getType()->isAnyPointerType() &&
1571       E->IgnoreParenCasts()->isNullPointerConstant(*this,
1572                                                 Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNull))
1573     return true;
1574 
1575   // Unfortunately, __null has type 'int'.
1576   if (isa<GNUNullExpr>(E)) return true;
1577 
1578   return false;
1579 }
1580 
1581 /// \brief Get the implementation of ObjCInterfaceDecl,or NULL if none exists.
1582 ObjCImplementationDecl *ASTContext::getObjCImplementation(ObjCInterfaceDecl *D) {
1583   llvm::DenseMap<ObjCContainerDecl*, ObjCImplDecl*>::iterator
1584     I = ObjCImpls.find(D);
1585   if (I != ObjCImpls.end())
1586     return cast<ObjCImplementationDecl>(I->second);
1587   return 0;
1588 }
1589 /// \brief Get the implementation of ObjCCategoryDecl, or NULL if none exists.
1590 ObjCCategoryImplDecl *ASTContext::getObjCImplementation(ObjCCategoryDecl *D) {
1591   llvm::DenseMap<ObjCContainerDecl*, ObjCImplDecl*>::iterator
1592     I = ObjCImpls.find(D);
1593   if (I != ObjCImpls.end())
1594     return cast<ObjCCategoryImplDecl>(I->second);
1595   return 0;
1596 }
1597 
1598 /// \brief Set the implementation of ObjCInterfaceDecl.
1599 void ASTContext::setObjCImplementation(ObjCInterfaceDecl *IFaceD,
1600                            ObjCImplementationDecl *ImplD) {
1601   assert(IFaceD && ImplD && "Passed null params");
1602   ObjCImpls[IFaceD] = ImplD;
1603 }
1604 /// \brief Set the implementation of ObjCCategoryDecl.
1605 void ASTContext::setObjCImplementation(ObjCCategoryDecl *CatD,
1606                            ObjCCategoryImplDecl *ImplD) {
1607   assert(CatD && ImplD && "Passed null params");
1608   ObjCImpls[CatD] = ImplD;
1609 }
1610 
1611 ObjCInterfaceDecl *ASTContext::getObjContainingInterface(NamedDecl *ND) const {
1612   if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *ID = dyn_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl>(ND->getDeclContext()))
1613     return ID;
1614   if (ObjCCategoryDecl *CD = dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryDecl>(ND->getDeclContext()))
1615     return CD->getClassInterface();
1616   if (ObjCImplDecl *IMD = dyn_cast<ObjCImplDecl>(ND->getDeclContext()))
1617     return IMD->getClassInterface();
1618 
1619   return 0;
1620 }
1621 
1622 /// \brief Get the copy initialization expression of VarDecl,or NULL if
1623 /// none exists.
1624 Expr *ASTContext::getBlockVarCopyInits(const VarDecl*VD) {
1625   assert(VD && "Passed null params");
1626   assert(VD->hasAttr<BlocksAttr>() &&
1627          "getBlockVarCopyInits - not __block var");
1628   llvm::DenseMap<const VarDecl*, Expr*>::iterator
1629     I = BlockVarCopyInits.find(VD);
1630   return (I != BlockVarCopyInits.end()) ? cast<Expr>(I->second) : 0;
1631 }
1632 
1633 /// \brief Set the copy inialization expression of a block var decl.
1634 void ASTContext::setBlockVarCopyInits(VarDecl*VD, Expr* Init) {
1635   assert(VD && Init && "Passed null params");
1636   assert(VD->hasAttr<BlocksAttr>() &&
1637          "setBlockVarCopyInits - not __block var");
1638   BlockVarCopyInits[VD] = Init;
1639 }
1640 
1641 TypeSourceInfo *ASTContext::CreateTypeSourceInfo(QualType T,
1642                                                  unsigned DataSize) const {
1643   if (!DataSize)
1644     DataSize = TypeLoc::getFullDataSizeForType(T);
1645   else
1646     assert(DataSize == TypeLoc::getFullDataSizeForType(T) &&
1647            "incorrect data size provided to CreateTypeSourceInfo!");
1648 
1649   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo =
1650     (TypeSourceInfo*)BumpAlloc.Allocate(sizeof(TypeSourceInfo) + DataSize, 8);
1651   new (TInfo) TypeSourceInfo(T);
1652   return TInfo;
1653 }
1654 
1655 TypeSourceInfo *ASTContext::getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(QualType T,
1656                                                      SourceLocation L) const {
1657   TypeSourceInfo *DI = CreateTypeSourceInfo(T);
1658   DI->getTypeLoc().initialize(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this), L);
1659   return DI;
1660 }
1661 
1662 const ASTRecordLayout &
1663 ASTContext::getASTObjCInterfaceLayout(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *D) const {
1664   return getObjCLayout(D, 0);
1665 }
1666 
1667 const ASTRecordLayout &
1668 ASTContext::getASTObjCImplementationLayout(
1669                                         const ObjCImplementationDecl *D) const {
1670   return getObjCLayout(D->getClassInterface(), D);
1671 }
1672 
1673 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1674 //                   Type creation/memoization methods
1675 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1676 
1677 QualType
1678 ASTContext::getExtQualType(const Type *baseType, Qualifiers quals) const {
1679   unsigned fastQuals = quals.getFastQualifiers();
1680   quals.removeFastQualifiers();
1681 
1682   // Check if we've already instantiated this type.
1683   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1684   ExtQuals::Profile(ID, baseType, quals);
1685   void *insertPos = 0;
1686   if (ExtQuals *eq = ExtQualNodes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos)) {
1687     assert(eq->getQualifiers() == quals);
1688     return QualType(eq, fastQuals);
1689   }
1690 
1691   // If the base type is not canonical, make the appropriate canonical type.
1692   QualType canon;
1693   if (!baseType->isCanonicalUnqualified()) {
1694     SplitQualType canonSplit = baseType->getCanonicalTypeInternal().split();
1695     canonSplit.Quals.addConsistentQualifiers(quals);
1696     canon = getExtQualType(canonSplit.Ty, canonSplit.Quals);
1697 
1698     // Re-find the insert position.
1699     (void) ExtQualNodes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
1700   }
1701 
1702   ExtQuals *eq = new (*this, TypeAlignment) ExtQuals(baseType, canon, quals);
1703   ExtQualNodes.InsertNode(eq, insertPos);
1704   return QualType(eq, fastQuals);
1705 }
1706 
1707 QualType
1708 ASTContext::getAddrSpaceQualType(QualType T, unsigned AddressSpace) const {
1709   QualType CanT = getCanonicalType(T);
1710   if (CanT.getAddressSpace() == AddressSpace)
1711     return T;
1712 
1713   // If we are composing extended qualifiers together, merge together
1714   // into one ExtQuals node.
1715   QualifierCollector Quals;
1716   const Type *TypeNode = Quals.strip(T);
1717 
1718   // If this type already has an address space specified, it cannot get
1719   // another one.
1720   assert(!Quals.hasAddressSpace() &&
1721          "Type cannot be in multiple addr spaces!");
1722   Quals.addAddressSpace(AddressSpace);
1723 
1724   return getExtQualType(TypeNode, Quals);
1725 }
1726 
1727 QualType ASTContext::getObjCGCQualType(QualType T,
1728                                        Qualifiers::GC GCAttr) const {
1729   QualType CanT = getCanonicalType(T);
1730   if (CanT.getObjCGCAttr() == GCAttr)
1731     return T;
1732 
1733   if (const PointerType *ptr = T->getAs<PointerType>()) {
1734     QualType Pointee = ptr->getPointeeType();
1735     if (Pointee->isAnyPointerType()) {
1736       QualType ResultType = getObjCGCQualType(Pointee, GCAttr);
1737       return getPointerType(ResultType);
1738     }
1739   }
1740 
1741   // If we are composing extended qualifiers together, merge together
1742   // into one ExtQuals node.
1743   QualifierCollector Quals;
1744   const Type *TypeNode = Quals.strip(T);
1745 
1746   // If this type already has an ObjCGC specified, it cannot get
1747   // another one.
1748   assert(!Quals.hasObjCGCAttr() &&
1749          "Type cannot have multiple ObjCGCs!");
1750   Quals.addObjCGCAttr(GCAttr);
1751 
1752   return getExtQualType(TypeNode, Quals);
1753 }
1754 
1755 const FunctionType *ASTContext::adjustFunctionType(const FunctionType *T,
1756                                                    FunctionType::ExtInfo Info) {
1757   if (T->getExtInfo() == Info)
1758     return T;
1759 
1760   QualType Result;
1761   if (const FunctionNoProtoType *FNPT = dyn_cast<FunctionNoProtoType>(T)) {
1762     Result = getFunctionNoProtoType(FNPT->getResultType(), Info);
1763   } else {
1764     const FunctionProtoType *FPT = cast<FunctionProtoType>(T);
1765     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = FPT->getExtProtoInfo();
1766     EPI.ExtInfo = Info;
1767     Result = getFunctionType(FPT->getResultType(), FPT->arg_type_begin(),
1768                              FPT->getNumArgs(), EPI);
1769   }
1770 
1771   return cast<FunctionType>(Result.getTypePtr());
1772 }
1773 
1774 /// getComplexType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a complex
1775 /// number with the specified element type.
1776 QualType ASTContext::getComplexType(QualType T) const {
1777   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1778   // structure.
1779   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1780   ComplexType::Profile(ID, T);
1781 
1782   void *InsertPos = 0;
1783   if (ComplexType *CT = ComplexTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1784     return QualType(CT, 0);
1785 
1786   // If the pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
1787   // so fill in the canonical type field.
1788   QualType Canonical;
1789   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
1790     Canonical = getComplexType(getCanonicalType(T));
1791 
1792     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1793     ComplexType *NewIP = ComplexTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1794     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1795   }
1796   ComplexType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) ComplexType(T, Canonical);
1797   Types.push_back(New);
1798   ComplexTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1799   return QualType(New, 0);
1800 }
1801 
1802 /// getPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a pointer to
1803 /// the specified type.
1804 QualType ASTContext::getPointerType(QualType T) const {
1805   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1806   // structure.
1807   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1808   PointerType::Profile(ID, T);
1809 
1810   void *InsertPos = 0;
1811   if (PointerType *PT = PointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1812     return QualType(PT, 0);
1813 
1814   // If the pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
1815   // so fill in the canonical type field.
1816   QualType Canonical;
1817   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
1818     Canonical = getPointerType(getCanonicalType(T));
1819 
1820     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1821     PointerType *NewIP = PointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1822     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1823   }
1824   PointerType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) PointerType(T, Canonical);
1825   Types.push_back(New);
1826   PointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1827   return QualType(New, 0);
1828 }
1829 
1830 /// getBlockPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for
1831 /// a pointer to the specified block.
1832 QualType ASTContext::getBlockPointerType(QualType T) const {
1833   assert(T->isFunctionType() && "block of function types only");
1834   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one block of a particular
1835   // structure.
1836   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1837   BlockPointerType::Profile(ID, T);
1838 
1839   void *InsertPos = 0;
1840   if (BlockPointerType *PT =
1841         BlockPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1842     return QualType(PT, 0);
1843 
1844   // If the block pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical
1845   // type either so fill in the canonical type field.
1846   QualType Canonical;
1847   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
1848     Canonical = getBlockPointerType(getCanonicalType(T));
1849 
1850     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1851     BlockPointerType *NewIP =
1852       BlockPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1853     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1854   }
1855   BlockPointerType *New
1856     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) BlockPointerType(T, Canonical);
1857   Types.push_back(New);
1858   BlockPointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1859   return QualType(New, 0);
1860 }
1861 
1862 /// getLValueReferenceType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for an
1863 /// lvalue reference to the specified type.
1864 QualType
1865 ASTContext::getLValueReferenceType(QualType T, bool SpelledAsLValue) const {
1866   assert(getCanonicalType(T) != OverloadTy &&
1867          "Unresolved overloaded function type");
1868 
1869   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1870   // structure.
1871   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1872   ReferenceType::Profile(ID, T, SpelledAsLValue);
1873 
1874   void *InsertPos = 0;
1875   if (LValueReferenceType *RT =
1876         LValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1877     return QualType(RT, 0);
1878 
1879   const ReferenceType *InnerRef = T->getAs<ReferenceType>();
1880 
1881   // If the referencee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
1882   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.
1883   QualType Canonical;
1884   if (!SpelledAsLValue || InnerRef || !T.isCanonical()) {
1885     QualType PointeeType = (InnerRef ? InnerRef->getPointeeType() : T);
1886     Canonical = getLValueReferenceType(getCanonicalType(PointeeType));
1887 
1888     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1889     LValueReferenceType *NewIP =
1890       LValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1891     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1892   }
1893 
1894   LValueReferenceType *New
1895     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) LValueReferenceType(T, Canonical,
1896                                                      SpelledAsLValue);
1897   Types.push_back(New);
1898   LValueReferenceTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1899 
1900   return QualType(New, 0);
1901 }
1902 
1903 /// getRValueReferenceType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for an
1904 /// rvalue reference to the specified type.
1905 QualType ASTContext::getRValueReferenceType(QualType T) const {
1906   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1907   // structure.
1908   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1909   ReferenceType::Profile(ID, T, false);
1910 
1911   void *InsertPos = 0;
1912   if (RValueReferenceType *RT =
1913         RValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1914     return QualType(RT, 0);
1915 
1916   const ReferenceType *InnerRef = T->getAs<ReferenceType>();
1917 
1918   // If the referencee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
1919   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.
1920   QualType Canonical;
1921   if (InnerRef || !T.isCanonical()) {
1922     QualType PointeeType = (InnerRef ? InnerRef->getPointeeType() : T);
1923     Canonical = getRValueReferenceType(getCanonicalType(PointeeType));
1924 
1925     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1926     RValueReferenceType *NewIP =
1927       RValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1928     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1929   }
1930 
1931   RValueReferenceType *New
1932     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) RValueReferenceType(T, Canonical);
1933   Types.push_back(New);
1934   RValueReferenceTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1935   return QualType(New, 0);
1936 }
1937 
1938 /// getMemberPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a
1939 /// member pointer to the specified type, in the specified class.
1940 QualType ASTContext::getMemberPointerType(QualType T, const Type *Cls) const {
1941   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1942   // structure.
1943   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1944   MemberPointerType::Profile(ID, T, Cls);
1945 
1946   void *InsertPos = 0;
1947   if (MemberPointerType *PT =
1948       MemberPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1949     return QualType(PT, 0);
1950 
1951   // If the pointee or class type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical
1952   // type either, so fill in the canonical type field.
1953   QualType Canonical;
1954   if (!T.isCanonical() || !Cls->isCanonicalUnqualified()) {
1955     Canonical = getMemberPointerType(getCanonicalType(T),getCanonicalType(Cls));
1956 
1957     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1958     MemberPointerType *NewIP =
1959       MemberPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1960     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1961   }
1962   MemberPointerType *New
1963     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) MemberPointerType(T, Cls, Canonical);
1964   Types.push_back(New);
1965   MemberPointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1966   return QualType(New, 0);
1967 }
1968 
1969 /// getConstantArrayType - Return the unique reference to the type for an
1970 /// array of the specified element type.
1971 QualType ASTContext::getConstantArrayType(QualType EltTy,
1972                                           const llvm::APInt &ArySizeIn,
1973                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
1974                                           unsigned IndexTypeQuals) const {
1975   assert((EltTy->isDependentType() ||
1976           EltTy->isIncompleteType() || EltTy->isConstantSizeType()) &&
1977          "Constant array of VLAs is illegal!");
1978 
1979   // Convert the array size into a canonical width matching the pointer size for
1980   // the target.
1981   llvm::APInt ArySize(ArySizeIn);
1982   ArySize =
1983     ArySize.zextOrTrunc(Target->getPointerWidth(getTargetAddressSpace(EltTy)));
1984 
1985   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1986   ConstantArrayType::Profile(ID, EltTy, ArySize, ASM, IndexTypeQuals);
1987 
1988   void *InsertPos = 0;
1989   if (ConstantArrayType *ATP =
1990       ConstantArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1991     return QualType(ATP, 0);
1992 
1993   // If the element type isn't canonical or has qualifiers, this won't
1994   // be a canonical type either, so fill in the canonical type field.
1995   QualType Canon;
1996   if (!EltTy.isCanonical() || EltTy.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
1997     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(EltTy).split();
1998     Canon = getConstantArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0), ArySize,
1999                                  ASM, IndexTypeQuals);
2000     Canon = getQualifiedType(Canon, canonSplit.Quals);
2001 
2002     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2003     ConstantArrayType *NewIP =
2004       ConstantArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2005     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2006   }
2007 
2008   ConstantArrayType *New = new(*this,TypeAlignment)
2009     ConstantArrayType(EltTy, Canon, ArySize, ASM, IndexTypeQuals);
2010   ConstantArrayTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2011   Types.push_back(New);
2012   return QualType(New, 0);
2013 }
2014 
2015 /// getVariableArrayDecayedType - Turns the given type, which may be
2016 /// variably-modified, into the corresponding type with all the known
2017 /// sizes replaced with [*].
2018 QualType ASTContext::getVariableArrayDecayedType(QualType type) const {
2019   // Vastly most common case.
2020   if (!type->isVariablyModifiedType()) return type;
2021 
2022   QualType result;
2023 
2024   SplitQualType split = type.getSplitDesugaredType();
2025   const Type *ty = split.Ty;
2026   switch (ty->getTypeClass()) {
2027 #define TYPE(Class, Base)
2028 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base)
2029 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
2030 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
2031     llvm_unreachable("didn't desugar past all non-canonical types?");
2032 
2033   // These types should never be variably-modified.
2034   case Type::Builtin:
2035   case Type::Complex:
2036   case Type::Vector:
2037   case Type::ExtVector:
2038   case Type::DependentSizedExtVector:
2039   case Type::ObjCObject:
2040   case Type::ObjCInterface:
2041   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer:
2042   case Type::Record:
2043   case Type::Enum:
2044   case Type::UnresolvedUsing:
2045   case Type::TypeOfExpr:
2046   case Type::TypeOf:
2047   case Type::Decltype:
2048   case Type::UnaryTransform:
2049   case Type::DependentName:
2050   case Type::InjectedClassName:
2051   case Type::TemplateSpecialization:
2052   case Type::DependentTemplateSpecialization:
2053   case Type::TemplateTypeParm:
2054   case Type::SubstTemplateTypeParmPack:
2055   case Type::Auto:
2056   case Type::PackExpansion:
2057     llvm_unreachable("type should never be variably-modified");
2058 
2059   // These types can be variably-modified but should never need to
2060   // further decay.
2061   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
2062   case Type::FunctionProto:
2063   case Type::BlockPointer:
2064   case Type::MemberPointer:
2065     return type;
2066 
2067   // These types can be variably-modified.  All these modifications
2068   // preserve structure except as noted by comments.
2069   // TODO: if we ever care about optimizing VLAs, there are no-op
2070   // optimizations available here.
2071   case Type::Pointer:
2072     result = getPointerType(getVariableArrayDecayedType(
2073                               cast<PointerType>(ty)->getPointeeType()));
2074     break;
2075 
2076   case Type::LValueReference: {
2077     const LValueReferenceType *lv = cast<LValueReferenceType>(ty);
2078     result = getLValueReferenceType(
2079                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(lv->getPointeeType()),
2080                                     lv->isSpelledAsLValue());
2081     break;
2082   }
2083 
2084   case Type::RValueReference: {
2085     const RValueReferenceType *lv = cast<RValueReferenceType>(ty);
2086     result = getRValueReferenceType(
2087                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(lv->getPointeeType()));
2088     break;
2089   }
2090 
2091   case Type::Atomic: {
2092     const AtomicType *at = cast<AtomicType>(ty);
2093     result = getAtomicType(getVariableArrayDecayedType(at->getValueType()));
2094     break;
2095   }
2096 
2097   case Type::ConstantArray: {
2098     const ConstantArrayType *cat = cast<ConstantArrayType>(ty);
2099     result = getConstantArrayType(
2100                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(cat->getElementType()),
2101                                   cat->getSize(),
2102                                   cat->getSizeModifier(),
2103                                   cat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers());
2104     break;
2105   }
2106 
2107   case Type::DependentSizedArray: {
2108     const DependentSizedArrayType *dat = cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(ty);
2109     result = getDependentSizedArrayType(
2110                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(dat->getElementType()),
2111                                         dat->getSizeExpr(),
2112                                         dat->getSizeModifier(),
2113                                         dat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
2114                                         dat->getBracketsRange());
2115     break;
2116   }
2117 
2118   // Turn incomplete types into [*] types.
2119   case Type::IncompleteArray: {
2120     const IncompleteArrayType *iat = cast<IncompleteArrayType>(ty);
2121     result = getVariableArrayType(
2122                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(iat->getElementType()),
2123                                   /*size*/ 0,
2124                                   ArrayType::Normal,
2125                                   iat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
2126                                   SourceRange());
2127     break;
2128   }
2129 
2130   // Turn VLA types into [*] types.
2131   case Type::VariableArray: {
2132     const VariableArrayType *vat = cast<VariableArrayType>(ty);
2133     result = getVariableArrayType(
2134                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(vat->getElementType()),
2135                                   /*size*/ 0,
2136                                   ArrayType::Star,
2137                                   vat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
2138                                   vat->getBracketsRange());
2139     break;
2140   }
2141   }
2142 
2143   // Apply the top-level qualifiers from the original.
2144   return getQualifiedType(result, split.Quals);
2145 }
2146 
2147 /// getVariableArrayType - Returns a non-unique reference to the type for a
2148 /// variable array of the specified element type.
2149 QualType ASTContext::getVariableArrayType(QualType EltTy,
2150                                           Expr *NumElts,
2151                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2152                                           unsigned IndexTypeQuals,
2153                                           SourceRange Brackets) const {
2154   // Since we don't unique expressions, it isn't possible to unique VLA's
2155   // that have an expression provided for their size.
2156   QualType Canon;
2157 
2158   // Be sure to pull qualifiers off the element type.
2159   if (!EltTy.isCanonical() || EltTy.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
2160     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(EltTy).split();
2161     Canon = getVariableArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0), NumElts, ASM,
2162                                  IndexTypeQuals, Brackets);
2163     Canon = getQualifiedType(Canon, canonSplit.Quals);
2164   }
2165 
2166   VariableArrayType *New = new(*this, TypeAlignment)
2167     VariableArrayType(EltTy, Canon, NumElts, ASM, IndexTypeQuals, Brackets);
2168 
2169   VariableArrayTypes.push_back(New);
2170   Types.push_back(New);
2171   return QualType(New, 0);
2172 }
2173 
2174 /// getDependentSizedArrayType - Returns a non-unique reference to
2175 /// the type for a dependently-sized array of the specified element
2176 /// type.
2177 QualType ASTContext::getDependentSizedArrayType(QualType elementType,
2178                                                 Expr *numElements,
2179                                                 ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2180                                                 unsigned elementTypeQuals,
2181                                                 SourceRange brackets) const {
2182   assert((!numElements || numElements->isTypeDependent() ||
2183           numElements->isValueDependent()) &&
2184          "Size must be type- or value-dependent!");
2185 
2186   // Dependently-sized array types that do not have a specified number
2187   // of elements will have their sizes deduced from a dependent
2188   // initializer.  We do no canonicalization here at all, which is okay
2189   // because they can't be used in most locations.
2190   if (!numElements) {
2191     DependentSizedArrayType *newType
2192       = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2193           DependentSizedArrayType(*this, elementType, QualType(),
2194                                   numElements, ASM, elementTypeQuals,
2195                                   brackets);
2196     Types.push_back(newType);
2197     return QualType(newType, 0);
2198   }
2199 
2200   // Otherwise, we actually build a new type every time, but we
2201   // also build a canonical type.
2202 
2203   SplitQualType canonElementType = getCanonicalType(elementType).split();
2204 
2205   void *insertPos = 0;
2206   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2207   DependentSizedArrayType::Profile(ID, *this,
2208                                    QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0),
2209                                    ASM, elementTypeQuals, numElements);
2210 
2211   // Look for an existing type with these properties.
2212   DependentSizedArrayType *canonTy =
2213     DependentSizedArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
2214 
2215   // If we don't have one, build one.
2216   if (!canonTy) {
2217     canonTy = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2218       DependentSizedArrayType(*this, QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0),
2219                               QualType(), numElements, ASM, elementTypeQuals,
2220                               brackets);
2221     DependentSizedArrayTypes.InsertNode(canonTy, insertPos);
2222     Types.push_back(canonTy);
2223   }
2224 
2225   // Apply qualifiers from the element type to the array.
2226   QualType canon = getQualifiedType(QualType(canonTy,0),
2227                                     canonElementType.Quals);
2228 
2229   // If we didn't need extra canonicalization for the element type,
2230   // then just use that as our result.
2231   if (QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0) == elementType)
2232     return canon;
2233 
2234   // Otherwise, we need to build a type which follows the spelling
2235   // of the element type.
2236   DependentSizedArrayType *sugaredType
2237     = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2238         DependentSizedArrayType(*this, elementType, canon, numElements,
2239                                 ASM, elementTypeQuals, brackets);
2240   Types.push_back(sugaredType);
2241   return QualType(sugaredType, 0);
2242 }
2243 
2244 QualType ASTContext::getIncompleteArrayType(QualType elementType,
2245                                             ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2246                                             unsigned elementTypeQuals) const {
2247   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2248   IncompleteArrayType::Profile(ID, elementType, ASM, elementTypeQuals);
2249 
2250   void *insertPos = 0;
2251   if (IncompleteArrayType *iat =
2252        IncompleteArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos))
2253     return QualType(iat, 0);
2254 
2255   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
2256   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.  We also have to pull
2257   // qualifiers off the element type.
2258   QualType canon;
2259 
2260   if (!elementType.isCanonical() || elementType.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
2261     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(elementType).split();
2262     canon = getIncompleteArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0),
2263                                    ASM, elementTypeQuals);
2264     canon = getQualifiedType(canon, canonSplit.Quals);
2265 
2266     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2267     IncompleteArrayType *existing =
2268       IncompleteArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
2269     assert(!existing && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void) existing;
2270   }
2271 
2272   IncompleteArrayType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2273     IncompleteArrayType(elementType, canon, ASM, elementTypeQuals);
2274 
2275   IncompleteArrayTypes.InsertNode(newType, insertPos);
2276   Types.push_back(newType);
2277   return QualType(newType, 0);
2278 }
2279 
2280 /// getVectorType - Return the unique reference to a vector type of
2281 /// the specified element type and size. VectorType must be a built-in type.
2282 QualType ASTContext::getVectorType(QualType vecType, unsigned NumElts,
2283                                    VectorType::VectorKind VecKind) const {
2284   assert(vecType->isBuiltinType());
2285 
2286   // Check if we've already instantiated a vector of this type.
2287   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2288   VectorType::Profile(ID, vecType, NumElts, Type::Vector, VecKind);
2289 
2290   void *InsertPos = 0;
2291   if (VectorType *VTP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2292     return QualType(VTP, 0);
2293 
2294   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
2295   // so fill in the canonical type field.
2296   QualType Canonical;
2297   if (!vecType.isCanonical()) {
2298     Canonical = getVectorType(getCanonicalType(vecType), NumElts, VecKind);
2299 
2300     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2301     VectorType *NewIP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2302     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2303   }
2304   VectorType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2305     VectorType(vecType, NumElts, Canonical, VecKind);
2306   VectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2307   Types.push_back(New);
2308   return QualType(New, 0);
2309 }
2310 
2311 /// getExtVectorType - Return the unique reference to an extended vector type of
2312 /// the specified element type and size. VectorType must be a built-in type.
2313 QualType
2314 ASTContext::getExtVectorType(QualType vecType, unsigned NumElts) const {
2315   assert(vecType->isBuiltinType() || vecType->isDependentType());
2316 
2317   // Check if we've already instantiated a vector of this type.
2318   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2319   VectorType::Profile(ID, vecType, NumElts, Type::ExtVector,
2320                       VectorType::GenericVector);
2321   void *InsertPos = 0;
2322   if (VectorType *VTP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2323     return QualType(VTP, 0);
2324 
2325   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
2326   // so fill in the canonical type field.
2327   QualType Canonical;
2328   if (!vecType.isCanonical()) {
2329     Canonical = getExtVectorType(getCanonicalType(vecType), NumElts);
2330 
2331     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2332     VectorType *NewIP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2333     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2334   }
2335   ExtVectorType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2336     ExtVectorType(vecType, NumElts, Canonical);
2337   VectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2338   Types.push_back(New);
2339   return QualType(New, 0);
2340 }
2341 
2342 QualType
2343 ASTContext::getDependentSizedExtVectorType(QualType vecType,
2344                                            Expr *SizeExpr,
2345                                            SourceLocation AttrLoc) const {
2346   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2347   DependentSizedExtVectorType::Profile(ID, *this, getCanonicalType(vecType),
2348                                        SizeExpr);
2349 
2350   void *InsertPos = 0;
2351   DependentSizedExtVectorType *Canon
2352     = DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2353   DependentSizedExtVectorType *New;
2354   if (Canon) {
2355     // We already have a canonical version of this array type; use it as
2356     // the canonical type for a newly-built type.
2357     New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2358       DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, QualType(Canon, 0),
2359                                   SizeExpr, AttrLoc);
2360   } else {
2361     QualType CanonVecTy = getCanonicalType(vecType);
2362     if (CanonVecTy == vecType) {
2363       New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2364         DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, QualType(), SizeExpr,
2365                                     AttrLoc);
2366 
2367       DependentSizedExtVectorType *CanonCheck
2368         = DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2369       assert(!CanonCheck && "Dependent-sized ext_vector canonical type broken");
2370       (void)CanonCheck;
2371       DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2372     } else {
2373       QualType Canon = getDependentSizedExtVectorType(CanonVecTy, SizeExpr,
2374                                                       SourceLocation());
2375       New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2376         DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, Canon, SizeExpr, AttrLoc);
2377     }
2378   }
2379 
2380   Types.push_back(New);
2381   return QualType(New, 0);
2382 }
2383 
2384 /// getFunctionNoProtoType - Return a K&R style C function type like 'int()'.
2385 ///
2386 QualType
2387 ASTContext::getFunctionNoProtoType(QualType ResultTy,
2388                                    const FunctionType::ExtInfo &Info) const {
2389   const CallingConv DefaultCC = Info.getCC();
2390   const CallingConv CallConv = (LangOpts.MRTD && DefaultCC == CC_Default) ?
2391                                CC_X86StdCall : DefaultCC;
2392   // Unique functions, to guarantee there is only one function of a particular
2393   // structure.
2394   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2395   FunctionNoProtoType::Profile(ID, ResultTy, Info);
2396 
2397   void *InsertPos = 0;
2398   if (FunctionNoProtoType *FT =
2399         FunctionNoProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2400     return QualType(FT, 0);
2401 
2402   QualType Canonical;
2403   if (!ResultTy.isCanonical() ||
2404       getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv) != CallConv) {
2405     Canonical =
2406       getFunctionNoProtoType(getCanonicalType(ResultTy),
2407                      Info.withCallingConv(getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv)));
2408 
2409     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2410     FunctionNoProtoType *NewIP =
2411       FunctionNoProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2412     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2413   }
2414 
2415   FunctionProtoType::ExtInfo newInfo = Info.withCallingConv(CallConv);
2416   FunctionNoProtoType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2417     FunctionNoProtoType(ResultTy, Canonical, newInfo);
2418   Types.push_back(New);
2419   FunctionNoProtoTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2420   return QualType(New, 0);
2421 }
2422 
2423 /// getFunctionType - Return a normal function type with a typed argument
2424 /// list.  isVariadic indicates whether the argument list includes '...'.
2425 QualType
2426 ASTContext::getFunctionType(QualType ResultTy,
2427                             const QualType *ArgArray, unsigned NumArgs,
2428                             const FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo &EPI) const {
2429   // Unique functions, to guarantee there is only one function of a particular
2430   // structure.
2431   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2432   FunctionProtoType::Profile(ID, ResultTy, ArgArray, NumArgs, EPI, *this);
2433 
2434   void *InsertPos = 0;
2435   if (FunctionProtoType *FTP =
2436         FunctionProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2437     return QualType(FTP, 0);
2438 
2439   // Determine whether the type being created is already canonical or not.
2440   bool isCanonical =
2441     EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_None && ResultTy.isCanonical() &&
2442     !EPI.HasTrailingReturn;
2443   for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs && isCanonical; ++i)
2444     if (!ArgArray[i].isCanonicalAsParam())
2445       isCanonical = false;
2446 
2447   const CallingConv DefaultCC = EPI.ExtInfo.getCC();
2448   const CallingConv CallConv = (LangOpts.MRTD && DefaultCC == CC_Default) ?
2449                                CC_X86StdCall : DefaultCC;
2450 
2451   // If this type isn't canonical, get the canonical version of it.
2452   // The exception spec is not part of the canonical type.
2453   QualType Canonical;
2454   if (!isCanonical || getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv) != CallConv) {
2455     SmallVector<QualType, 16> CanonicalArgs;
2456     CanonicalArgs.reserve(NumArgs);
2457     for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs; ++i)
2458       CanonicalArgs.push_back(getCanonicalParamType(ArgArray[i]));
2459 
2460     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo CanonicalEPI = EPI;
2461     CanonicalEPI.HasTrailingReturn = false;
2462     CanonicalEPI.ExceptionSpecType = EST_None;
2463     CanonicalEPI.NumExceptions = 0;
2464     CanonicalEPI.ExtInfo
2465       = CanonicalEPI.ExtInfo.withCallingConv(getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv));
2466 
2467     Canonical = getFunctionType(getCanonicalType(ResultTy),
2468                                 CanonicalArgs.data(), NumArgs,
2469                                 CanonicalEPI);
2470 
2471     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2472     FunctionProtoType *NewIP =
2473       FunctionProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2474     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2475   }
2476 
2477   // FunctionProtoType objects are allocated with extra bytes after
2478   // them for three variable size arrays at the end:
2479   //  - parameter types
2480   //  - exception types
2481   //  - consumed-arguments flags
2482   // Instead of the exception types, there could be a noexcept
2483   // expression, or information used to resolve the exception
2484   // specification.
2485   size_t Size = sizeof(FunctionProtoType) +
2486                 NumArgs * sizeof(QualType);
2487   if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Dynamic) {
2488     Size += EPI.NumExceptions * sizeof(QualType);
2489   } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_ComputedNoexcept) {
2490     Size += sizeof(Expr*);
2491   } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Uninstantiated) {
2492     Size += 2 * sizeof(FunctionDecl*);
2493   } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Unevaluated) {
2494     Size += sizeof(FunctionDecl*);
2495   }
2496   if (EPI.ConsumedArguments)
2497     Size += NumArgs * sizeof(bool);
2498 
2499   FunctionProtoType *FTP = (FunctionProtoType*) Allocate(Size, TypeAlignment);
2500   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo newEPI = EPI;
2501   newEPI.ExtInfo = EPI.ExtInfo.withCallingConv(CallConv);
2502   new (FTP) FunctionProtoType(ResultTy, ArgArray, NumArgs, Canonical, newEPI);
2503   Types.push_back(FTP);
2504   FunctionProtoTypes.InsertNode(FTP, InsertPos);
2505   return QualType(FTP, 0);
2506 }
2507 
2508 #ifndef NDEBUG
2509 static bool NeedsInjectedClassNameType(const RecordDecl *D) {
2510   if (!isa<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) return false;
2511   const CXXRecordDecl *RD = cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D);
2512   if (isa<ClassTemplatePartialSpecializationDecl>(RD))
2513     return true;
2514   if (RD->getDescribedClassTemplate() &&
2515       !isa<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(RD))
2516     return true;
2517   return false;
2518 }
2519 #endif
2520 
2521 /// getInjectedClassNameType - Return the unique reference to the
2522 /// injected class name type for the specified templated declaration.
2523 QualType ASTContext::getInjectedClassNameType(CXXRecordDecl *Decl,
2524                                               QualType TST) const {
2525   assert(NeedsInjectedClassNameType(Decl));
2526   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) {
2527     assert(isa<InjectedClassNameType>(Decl->TypeForDecl));
2528   } else if (CXXRecordDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl()) {
2529     assert(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl && "previous declaration has no type");
2530     Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl;
2531     assert(isa<InjectedClassNameType>(Decl->TypeForDecl));
2532   } else {
2533     Type *newType =
2534       new (*this, TypeAlignment) InjectedClassNameType(Decl, TST);
2535     Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2536     Types.push_back(newType);
2537   }
2538   return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2539 }
2540 
2541 /// getTypeDeclType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
2542 /// specified type declaration.
2543 QualType ASTContext::getTypeDeclTypeSlow(const TypeDecl *Decl) const {
2544   assert(Decl && "Passed null for Decl param");
2545   assert(!Decl->TypeForDecl && "TypeForDecl present in slow case");
2546 
2547   if (const TypedefNameDecl *Typedef = dyn_cast<TypedefNameDecl>(Decl))
2548     return getTypedefType(Typedef);
2549 
2550   assert(!isa<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(Decl) &&
2551          "Template type parameter types are always available.");
2552 
2553   if (const RecordDecl *Record = dyn_cast<RecordDecl>(Decl)) {
2554     assert(!Record->getPreviousDecl() &&
2555            "struct/union has previous declaration");
2556     assert(!NeedsInjectedClassNameType(Record));
2557     return getRecordType(Record);
2558   } else if (const EnumDecl *Enum = dyn_cast<EnumDecl>(Decl)) {
2559     assert(!Enum->getPreviousDecl() &&
2560            "enum has previous declaration");
2561     return getEnumType(Enum);
2562   } else if (const UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl *Using =
2563                dyn_cast<UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl>(Decl)) {
2564     Type *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) UnresolvedUsingType(Using);
2565     Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2566     Types.push_back(newType);
2567   } else
2568     llvm_unreachable("TypeDecl without a type?");
2569 
2570   return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2571 }
2572 
2573 /// getTypedefType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
2574 /// specified typedef name decl.
2575 QualType
2576 ASTContext::getTypedefType(const TypedefNameDecl *Decl,
2577                            QualType Canonical) const {
2578   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2579 
2580   if (Canonical.isNull())
2581     Canonical = getCanonicalType(Decl->getUnderlyingType());
2582   TypedefType *newType = new(*this, TypeAlignment)
2583     TypedefType(Type::Typedef, Decl, Canonical);
2584   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2585   Types.push_back(newType);
2586   return QualType(newType, 0);
2587 }
2588 
2589 QualType ASTContext::getRecordType(const RecordDecl *Decl) const {
2590   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2591 
2592   if (const RecordDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl())
2593     if (PrevDecl->TypeForDecl)
2594       return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2595 
2596   RecordType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) RecordType(Decl);
2597   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2598   Types.push_back(newType);
2599   return QualType(newType, 0);
2600 }
2601 
2602 QualType ASTContext::getEnumType(const EnumDecl *Decl) const {
2603   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2604 
2605   if (const EnumDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl())
2606     if (PrevDecl->TypeForDecl)
2607       return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2608 
2609   EnumType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) EnumType(Decl);
2610   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2611   Types.push_back(newType);
2612   return QualType(newType, 0);
2613 }
2614 
2615 QualType ASTContext::getAttributedType(AttributedType::Kind attrKind,
2616                                        QualType modifiedType,
2617                                        QualType equivalentType) {
2618   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID id;
2619   AttributedType::Profile(id, attrKind, modifiedType, equivalentType);
2620 
2621   void *insertPos = 0;
2622   AttributedType *type = AttributedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(id, insertPos);
2623   if (type) return QualType(type, 0);
2624 
2625   QualType canon = getCanonicalType(equivalentType);
2626   type = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2627            AttributedType(canon, attrKind, modifiedType, equivalentType);
2628 
2629   Types.push_back(type);
2630   AttributedTypes.InsertNode(type, insertPos);
2631 
2632   return QualType(type, 0);
2633 }
2634 
2635 
2636 /// \brief Retrieve a substitution-result type.
2637 QualType
2638 ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTypeParmType(const TemplateTypeParmType *Parm,
2639                                          QualType Replacement) const {
2640   assert(Replacement.isCanonical()
2641          && "replacement types must always be canonical");
2642 
2643   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2644   SubstTemplateTypeParmType::Profile(ID, Parm, Replacement);
2645   void *InsertPos = 0;
2646   SubstTemplateTypeParmType *SubstParm
2647     = SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2648 
2649   if (!SubstParm) {
2650     SubstParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2651       SubstTemplateTypeParmType(Parm, Replacement);
2652     Types.push_back(SubstParm);
2653     SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(SubstParm, InsertPos);
2654   }
2655 
2656   return QualType(SubstParm, 0);
2657 }
2658 
2659 /// \brief Retrieve a
2660 QualType ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(
2661                                           const TemplateTypeParmType *Parm,
2662                                               const TemplateArgument &ArgPack) {
2663 #ifndef NDEBUG
2664   for (TemplateArgument::pack_iterator P = ArgPack.pack_begin(),
2665                                     PEnd = ArgPack.pack_end();
2666        P != PEnd; ++P) {
2667     assert(P->getKind() == TemplateArgument::Type &&"Pack contains a non-type");
2668     assert(P->getAsType().isCanonical() && "Pack contains non-canonical type");
2669   }
2670 #endif
2671 
2672   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2673   SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType::Profile(ID, Parm, ArgPack);
2674   void *InsertPos = 0;
2675   if (SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType *SubstParm
2676         = SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2677     return QualType(SubstParm, 0);
2678 
2679   QualType Canon;
2680   if (!Parm->isCanonicalUnqualified()) {
2681     Canon = getCanonicalType(QualType(Parm, 0));
2682     Canon = getSubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(cast<TemplateTypeParmType>(Canon),
2683                                              ArgPack);
2684     SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2685   }
2686 
2687   SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType *SubstParm
2688     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(Parm, Canon,
2689                                                                ArgPack);
2690   Types.push_back(SubstParm);
2691   SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(SubstParm, InsertPos);
2692   return QualType(SubstParm, 0);
2693 }
2694 
2695 /// \brief Retrieve the template type parameter type for a template
2696 /// parameter or parameter pack with the given depth, index, and (optionally)
2697 /// name.
2698 QualType ASTContext::getTemplateTypeParmType(unsigned Depth, unsigned Index,
2699                                              bool ParameterPack,
2700                                              TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTPDecl) const {
2701   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2702   TemplateTypeParmType::Profile(ID, Depth, Index, ParameterPack, TTPDecl);
2703   void *InsertPos = 0;
2704   TemplateTypeParmType *TypeParm
2705     = TemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2706 
2707   if (TypeParm)
2708     return QualType(TypeParm, 0);
2709 
2710   if (TTPDecl) {
2711     QualType Canon = getTemplateTypeParmType(Depth, Index, ParameterPack);
2712     TypeParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TemplateTypeParmType(TTPDecl, Canon);
2713 
2714     TemplateTypeParmType *TypeCheck
2715       = TemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2716     assert(!TypeCheck && "Template type parameter canonical type broken");
2717     (void)TypeCheck;
2718   } else
2719     TypeParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2720       TemplateTypeParmType(Depth, Index, ParameterPack);
2721 
2722   Types.push_back(TypeParm);
2723   TemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(TypeParm, InsertPos);
2724 
2725   return QualType(TypeParm, 0);
2726 }
2727 
2728 TypeSourceInfo *
2729 ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationTypeInfo(TemplateName Name,
2730                                               SourceLocation NameLoc,
2731                                         const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args,
2732                                               QualType Underlying) const {
2733   assert(!Name.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2734          "No dependent template names here!");
2735   QualType TST = getTemplateSpecializationType(Name, Args, Underlying);
2736 
2737   TypeSourceInfo *DI = CreateTypeSourceInfo(TST);
2738   TemplateSpecializationTypeLoc TL
2739     = cast<TemplateSpecializationTypeLoc>(DI->getTypeLoc());
2740   TL.setTemplateKeywordLoc(SourceLocation());
2741   TL.setTemplateNameLoc(NameLoc);
2742   TL.setLAngleLoc(Args.getLAngleLoc());
2743   TL.setRAngleLoc(Args.getRAngleLoc());
2744   for (unsigned i = 0, e = TL.getNumArgs(); i != e; ++i)
2745     TL.setArgLocInfo(i, Args[i].getLocInfo());
2746   return DI;
2747 }
2748 
2749 QualType
2750 ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,
2751                                           const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args,
2752                                           QualType Underlying) const {
2753   assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2754          "No dependent template names here!");
2755 
2756   unsigned NumArgs = Args.size();
2757 
2758   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 4> ArgVec;
2759   ArgVec.reserve(NumArgs);
2760   for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs; ++i)
2761     ArgVec.push_back(Args[i].getArgument());
2762 
2763   return getTemplateSpecializationType(Template, ArgVec.data(), NumArgs,
2764                                        Underlying);
2765 }
2766 
2767 #ifndef NDEBUG
2768 static bool hasAnyPackExpansions(const TemplateArgument *Args,
2769                                  unsigned NumArgs) {
2770   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I)
2771     if (Args[I].isPackExpansion())
2772       return true;
2773 
2774   return true;
2775 }
2776 #endif
2777 
2778 QualType
2779 ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,
2780                                           const TemplateArgument *Args,
2781                                           unsigned NumArgs,
2782                                           QualType Underlying) const {
2783   assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2784          "No dependent template names here!");
2785   // Look through qualified template names.
2786   if (QualifiedTemplateName *QTN = Template.getAsQualifiedTemplateName())
2787     Template = TemplateName(QTN->getTemplateDecl());
2788 
2789   bool IsTypeAlias =
2790     Template.getAsTemplateDecl() &&
2791     isa<TypeAliasTemplateDecl>(Template.getAsTemplateDecl());
2792   QualType CanonType;
2793   if (!Underlying.isNull())
2794     CanonType = getCanonicalType(Underlying);
2795   else {
2796     // We can get here with an alias template when the specialization contains
2797     // a pack expansion that does not match up with a parameter pack.
2798     assert((!IsTypeAlias || hasAnyPackExpansions(Args, NumArgs)) &&
2799            "Caller must compute aliased type");
2800     IsTypeAlias = false;
2801     CanonType = getCanonicalTemplateSpecializationType(Template, Args,
2802                                                        NumArgs);
2803   }
2804 
2805   // Allocate the (non-canonical) template specialization type, but don't
2806   // try to unique it: these types typically have location information that
2807   // we don't unique and don't want to lose.
2808   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(TemplateSpecializationType) +
2809                        sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs +
2810                        (IsTypeAlias? sizeof(QualType) : 0),
2811                        TypeAlignment);
2812   TemplateSpecializationType *Spec
2813     = new (Mem) TemplateSpecializationType(Template, Args, NumArgs, CanonType,
2814                                          IsTypeAlias ? Underlying : QualType());
2815 
2816   Types.push_back(Spec);
2817   return QualType(Spec, 0);
2818 }
2819 
2820 QualType
2821 ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,
2822                                                    const TemplateArgument *Args,
2823                                                    unsigned NumArgs) const {
2824   assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2825          "No dependent template names here!");
2826 
2827   // Look through qualified template names.
2828   if (QualifiedTemplateName *QTN = Template.getAsQualifiedTemplateName())
2829     Template = TemplateName(QTN->getTemplateDecl());
2830 
2831   // Build the canonical template specialization type.
2832   TemplateName CanonTemplate = getCanonicalTemplateName(Template);
2833   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 4> CanonArgs;
2834   CanonArgs.reserve(NumArgs);
2835   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I)
2836     CanonArgs.push_back(getCanonicalTemplateArgument(Args[I]));
2837 
2838   // Determine whether this canonical template specialization type already
2839   // exists.
2840   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2841   TemplateSpecializationType::Profile(ID, CanonTemplate,
2842                                       CanonArgs.data(), NumArgs, *this);
2843 
2844   void *InsertPos = 0;
2845   TemplateSpecializationType *Spec
2846     = TemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2847 
2848   if (!Spec) {
2849     // Allocate a new canonical template specialization type.
2850     void *Mem = Allocate((sizeof(TemplateSpecializationType) +
2851                           sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs),
2852                          TypeAlignment);
2853     Spec = new (Mem) TemplateSpecializationType(CanonTemplate,
2854                                                 CanonArgs.data(), NumArgs,
2855                                                 QualType(), QualType());
2856     Types.push_back(Spec);
2857     TemplateSpecializationTypes.InsertNode(Spec, InsertPos);
2858   }
2859 
2860   assert(Spec->isDependentType() &&
2861          "Non-dependent template-id type must have a canonical type");
2862   return QualType(Spec, 0);
2863 }
2864 
2865 QualType
2866 ASTContext::getElaboratedType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
2867                               NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
2868                               QualType NamedType) const {
2869   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2870   ElaboratedType::Profile(ID, Keyword, NNS, NamedType);
2871 
2872   void *InsertPos = 0;
2873   ElaboratedType *T = ElaboratedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2874   if (T)
2875     return QualType(T, 0);
2876 
2877   QualType Canon = NamedType;
2878   if (!Canon.isCanonical()) {
2879     Canon = getCanonicalType(NamedType);
2880     ElaboratedType *CheckT = ElaboratedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2881     assert(!CheckT && "Elaborated canonical type broken");
2882     (void)CheckT;
2883   }
2884 
2885   T = new (*this) ElaboratedType(Keyword, NNS, NamedType, Canon);
2886   Types.push_back(T);
2887   ElaboratedTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
2888   return QualType(T, 0);
2889 }
2890 
2891 QualType
2892 ASTContext::getParenType(QualType InnerType) const {
2893   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2894   ParenType::Profile(ID, InnerType);
2895 
2896   void *InsertPos = 0;
2897   ParenType *T = ParenTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2898   if (T)
2899     return QualType(T, 0);
2900 
2901   QualType Canon = InnerType;
2902   if (!Canon.isCanonical()) {
2903     Canon = getCanonicalType(InnerType);
2904     ParenType *CheckT = ParenTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2905     assert(!CheckT && "Paren canonical type broken");
2906     (void)CheckT;
2907   }
2908 
2909   T = new (*this) ParenType(InnerType, Canon);
2910   Types.push_back(T);
2911   ParenTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
2912   return QualType(T, 0);
2913 }
2914 
2915 QualType ASTContext::getDependentNameType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
2916                                           NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
2917                                           const IdentifierInfo *Name,
2918                                           QualType Canon) const {
2919   assert(NNS->isDependent() && "nested-name-specifier must be dependent");
2920 
2921   if (Canon.isNull()) {
2922     NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
2923     ElaboratedTypeKeyword CanonKeyword = Keyword;
2924     if (Keyword == ETK_None)
2925       CanonKeyword = ETK_Typename;
2926 
2927     if (CanonNNS != NNS || CanonKeyword != Keyword)
2928       Canon = getDependentNameType(CanonKeyword, CanonNNS, Name);
2929   }
2930 
2931   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2932   DependentNameType::Profile(ID, Keyword, NNS, Name);
2933 
2934   void *InsertPos = 0;
2935   DependentNameType *T
2936     = DependentNameTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2937   if (T)
2938     return QualType(T, 0);
2939 
2940   T = new (*this) DependentNameType(Keyword, NNS, Name, Canon);
2941   Types.push_back(T);
2942   DependentNameTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
2943   return QualType(T, 0);
2944 }
2945 
2946 QualType
2947 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(
2948                                  ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
2949                                  NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
2950                                  const IdentifierInfo *Name,
2951                                  const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args) const {
2952   // TODO: avoid this copy
2953   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 16> ArgCopy;
2954   for (unsigned I = 0, E = Args.size(); I != E; ++I)
2955     ArgCopy.push_back(Args[I].getArgument());
2956   return getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(Keyword, NNS, Name,
2957                                                 ArgCopy.size(),
2958                                                 ArgCopy.data());
2959 }
2960 
2961 QualType
2962 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(
2963                                  ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
2964                                  NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
2965                                  const IdentifierInfo *Name,
2966                                  unsigned NumArgs,
2967                                  const TemplateArgument *Args) const {
2968   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) &&
2969          "nested-name-specifier must be dependent");
2970 
2971   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2972   DependentTemplateSpecializationType::Profile(ID, *this, Keyword, NNS,
2973                                                Name, NumArgs, Args);
2974 
2975   void *InsertPos = 0;
2976   DependentTemplateSpecializationType *T
2977     = DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2978   if (T)
2979     return QualType(T, 0);
2980 
2981   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
2982 
2983   ElaboratedTypeKeyword CanonKeyword = Keyword;
2984   if (Keyword == ETK_None) CanonKeyword = ETK_Typename;
2985 
2986   bool AnyNonCanonArgs = false;
2987   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 16> CanonArgs(NumArgs);
2988   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I) {
2989     CanonArgs[I] = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(Args[I]);
2990     if (!CanonArgs[I].structurallyEquals(Args[I]))
2991       AnyNonCanonArgs = true;
2992   }
2993 
2994   QualType Canon;
2995   if (AnyNonCanonArgs || CanonNNS != NNS || CanonKeyword != Keyword) {
2996     Canon = getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(CanonKeyword, CanonNNS,
2997                                                    Name, NumArgs,
2998                                                    CanonArgs.data());
2999 
3000     // Find the insert position again.
3001     DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3002   }
3003 
3004   void *Mem = Allocate((sizeof(DependentTemplateSpecializationType) +
3005                         sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs),
3006                        TypeAlignment);
3007   T = new (Mem) DependentTemplateSpecializationType(Keyword, NNS,
3008                                                     Name, NumArgs, Args, Canon);
3009   Types.push_back(T);
3010   DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3011   return QualType(T, 0);
3012 }
3013 
3014 QualType ASTContext::getPackExpansionType(QualType Pattern,
3015                                       llvm::Optional<unsigned> NumExpansions) {
3016   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3017   PackExpansionType::Profile(ID, Pattern, NumExpansions);
3018 
3019   assert(Pattern->containsUnexpandedParameterPack() &&
3020          "Pack expansions must expand one or more parameter packs");
3021   void *InsertPos = 0;
3022   PackExpansionType *T
3023     = PackExpansionTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3024   if (T)
3025     return QualType(T, 0);
3026 
3027   QualType Canon;
3028   if (!Pattern.isCanonical()) {
3029     Canon = getCanonicalType(Pattern);
3030     // The canonical type might not contain an unexpanded parameter pack, if it
3031     // contains an alias template specialization which ignores one of its
3032     // parameters.
3033     if (Canon->containsUnexpandedParameterPack()) {
3034       Canon = getPackExpansionType(getCanonicalType(Pattern), NumExpansions);
3035 
3036       // Find the insert position again, in case we inserted an element into
3037       // PackExpansionTypes and invalidated our insert position.
3038       PackExpansionTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3039     }
3040   }
3041 
3042   T = new (*this) PackExpansionType(Pattern, Canon, NumExpansions);
3043   Types.push_back(T);
3044   PackExpansionTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3045   return QualType(T, 0);
3046 }
3047 
3048 /// CmpProtocolNames - Comparison predicate for sorting protocols
3049 /// alphabetically.
3050 static bool CmpProtocolNames(const ObjCProtocolDecl *LHS,
3051                             const ObjCProtocolDecl *RHS) {
3052   return LHS->getDeclName() < RHS->getDeclName();
3053 }
3054 
3055 static bool areSortedAndUniqued(ObjCProtocolDecl * const *Protocols,
3056                                 unsigned NumProtocols) {
3057   if (NumProtocols == 0) return true;
3058 
3059   if (Protocols[0]->getCanonicalDecl() != Protocols[0])
3060     return false;
3061 
3062   for (unsigned i = 1; i != NumProtocols; ++i)
3063     if (!CmpProtocolNames(Protocols[i-1], Protocols[i]) ||
3064         Protocols[i]->getCanonicalDecl() != Protocols[i])
3065       return false;
3066   return true;
3067 }
3068 
3069 static void SortAndUniqueProtocols(ObjCProtocolDecl **Protocols,
3070                                    unsigned &NumProtocols) {
3071   ObjCProtocolDecl **ProtocolsEnd = Protocols+NumProtocols;
3072 
3073   // Sort protocols, keyed by name.
3074   std::sort(Protocols, Protocols+NumProtocols, CmpProtocolNames);
3075 
3076   // Canonicalize.
3077   for (unsigned I = 0, N = NumProtocols; I != N; ++I)
3078     Protocols[I] = Protocols[I]->getCanonicalDecl();
3079 
3080   // Remove duplicates.
3081   ProtocolsEnd = std::unique(Protocols, ProtocolsEnd);
3082   NumProtocols = ProtocolsEnd-Protocols;
3083 }
3084 
3085 QualType ASTContext::getObjCObjectType(QualType BaseType,
3086                                        ObjCProtocolDecl * const *Protocols,
3087                                        unsigned NumProtocols) const {
3088   // If the base type is an interface and there aren't any protocols
3089   // to add, then the interface type will do just fine.
3090   if (!NumProtocols && isa<ObjCInterfaceType>(BaseType))
3091     return BaseType;
3092 
3093   // Look in the folding set for an existing type.
3094   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3095   ObjCObjectTypeImpl::Profile(ID, BaseType, Protocols, NumProtocols);
3096   void *InsertPos = 0;
3097   if (ObjCObjectType *QT = ObjCObjectTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3098     return QualType(QT, 0);
3099 
3100   // Build the canonical type, which has the canonical base type and
3101   // a sorted-and-uniqued list of protocols.
3102   QualType Canonical;
3103   bool ProtocolsSorted = areSortedAndUniqued(Protocols, NumProtocols);
3104   if (!ProtocolsSorted || !BaseType.isCanonical()) {
3105     if (!ProtocolsSorted) {
3106       SmallVector<ObjCProtocolDecl*, 8> Sorted(Protocols,
3107                                                      Protocols + NumProtocols);
3108       unsigned UniqueCount = NumProtocols;
3109 
3110       SortAndUniqueProtocols(&Sorted[0], UniqueCount);
3111       Canonical = getObjCObjectType(getCanonicalType(BaseType),
3112                                     &Sorted[0], UniqueCount);
3113     } else {
3114       Canonical = getObjCObjectType(getCanonicalType(BaseType),
3115                                     Protocols, NumProtocols);
3116     }
3117 
3118     // Regenerate InsertPos.
3119     ObjCObjectTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3120   }
3121 
3122   unsigned Size = sizeof(ObjCObjectTypeImpl);
3123   Size += NumProtocols * sizeof(ObjCProtocolDecl *);
3124   void *Mem = Allocate(Size, TypeAlignment);
3125   ObjCObjectTypeImpl *T =
3126     new (Mem) ObjCObjectTypeImpl(Canonical, BaseType, Protocols, NumProtocols);
3127 
3128   Types.push_back(T);
3129   ObjCObjectTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3130   return QualType(T, 0);
3131 }
3132 
3133 /// getObjCObjectPointerType - Return a ObjCObjectPointerType type for
3134 /// the given object type.
3135 QualType ASTContext::getObjCObjectPointerType(QualType ObjectT) const {
3136   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3137   ObjCObjectPointerType::Profile(ID, ObjectT);
3138 
3139   void *InsertPos = 0;
3140   if (ObjCObjectPointerType *QT =
3141               ObjCObjectPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3142     return QualType(QT, 0);
3143 
3144   // Find the canonical object type.
3145   QualType Canonical;
3146   if (!ObjectT.isCanonical()) {
3147     Canonical = getObjCObjectPointerType(getCanonicalType(ObjectT));
3148 
3149     // Regenerate InsertPos.
3150     ObjCObjectPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3151   }
3152 
3153   // No match.
3154   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(ObjCObjectPointerType), TypeAlignment);
3155   ObjCObjectPointerType *QType =
3156     new (Mem) ObjCObjectPointerType(Canonical, ObjectT);
3157 
3158   Types.push_back(QType);
3159   ObjCObjectPointerTypes.InsertNode(QType, InsertPos);
3160   return QualType(QType, 0);
3161 }
3162 
3163 /// getObjCInterfaceType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
3164 /// specified ObjC interface decl. The list of protocols is optional.
3165 QualType ASTContext::getObjCInterfaceType(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *Decl,
3166                                           ObjCInterfaceDecl *PrevDecl) const {
3167   if (Decl->TypeForDecl)
3168     return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
3169 
3170   if (PrevDecl) {
3171     assert(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl && "previous decl has no TypeForDecl");
3172     Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl;
3173     return QualType(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);
3174   }
3175 
3176   // Prefer the definition, if there is one.
3177   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *Def = Decl->getDefinition())
3178     Decl = Def;
3179 
3180   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(ObjCInterfaceType), TypeAlignment);
3181   ObjCInterfaceType *T = new (Mem) ObjCInterfaceType(Decl);
3182   Decl->TypeForDecl = T;
3183   Types.push_back(T);
3184   return QualType(T, 0);
3185 }
3186 
3187 /// getTypeOfExprType - Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we can't unique
3188 /// TypeOfExprType AST's (since expression's are never shared). For example,
3189 /// multiple declarations that refer to "typeof(x)" all contain different
3190 /// DeclRefExpr's. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates
3191 /// on canonical type's (which are always unique).
3192 QualType ASTContext::getTypeOfExprType(Expr *tofExpr) const {
3193   TypeOfExprType *toe;
3194   if (tofExpr->isTypeDependent()) {
3195     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3196     DependentTypeOfExprType::Profile(ID, *this, tofExpr);
3197 
3198     void *InsertPos = 0;
3199     DependentTypeOfExprType *Canon
3200       = DependentTypeOfExprTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3201     if (Canon) {
3202       // We already have a "canonical" version of an identical, dependent
3203       // typeof(expr) type. Use that as our canonical type.
3204       toe = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfExprType(tofExpr,
3205                                           QualType((TypeOfExprType*)Canon, 0));
3206     } else {
3207       // Build a new, canonical typeof(expr) type.
3208       Canon
3209         = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DependentTypeOfExprType(*this, tofExpr);
3210       DependentTypeOfExprTypes.InsertNode(Canon, InsertPos);
3211       toe = Canon;
3212     }
3213   } else {
3214     QualType Canonical = getCanonicalType(tofExpr->getType());
3215     toe = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfExprType(tofExpr, Canonical);
3216   }
3217   Types.push_back(toe);
3218   return QualType(toe, 0);
3219 }
3220 
3221 /// getTypeOfType -  Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we don't unique
3222 /// TypeOfType AST's. The only motivation to unique these nodes would be
3223 /// memory savings. Since typeof(t) is fairly uncommon, space shouldn't be
3224 /// an issue. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates
3225 /// on canonical type's (which are always unique).
3226 QualType ASTContext::getTypeOfType(QualType tofType) const {
3227   QualType Canonical = getCanonicalType(tofType);
3228   TypeOfType *tot = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfType(tofType, Canonical);
3229   Types.push_back(tot);
3230   return QualType(tot, 0);
3231 }
3232 
3233 
3234 /// getDecltypeType -  Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we don't unique
3235 /// DecltypeType AST's. The only motivation to unique these nodes would be
3236 /// memory savings. Since decltype(t) is fairly uncommon, space shouldn't be
3237 /// an issue. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates
3238 /// on canonical types (which are always unique).
3239 QualType ASTContext::getDecltypeType(Expr *e, QualType UnderlyingType) const {
3240   DecltypeType *dt;
3241 
3242   // C++0x [temp.type]p2:
3243   //   If an expression e involves a template parameter, decltype(e) denotes a
3244   //   unique dependent type. Two such decltype-specifiers refer to the same
3245   //   type only if their expressions are equivalent (14.5.6.1).
3246   if (e->isInstantiationDependent()) {
3247     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3248     DependentDecltypeType::Profile(ID, *this, e);
3249 
3250     void *InsertPos = 0;
3251     DependentDecltypeType *Canon
3252       = DependentDecltypeTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3253     if (Canon) {
3254       // We already have a "canonical" version of an equivalent, dependent
3255       // decltype type. Use that as our canonical type.
3256       dt = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DecltypeType(e, UnderlyingType,
3257                                        QualType((DecltypeType*)Canon, 0));
3258     } else {
3259       // Build a new, canonical typeof(expr) type.
3260       Canon = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DependentDecltypeType(*this, e);
3261       DependentDecltypeTypes.InsertNode(Canon, InsertPos);
3262       dt = Canon;
3263     }
3264   } else {
3265     dt = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DecltypeType(e, UnderlyingType,
3266                                       getCanonicalType(UnderlyingType));
3267   }
3268   Types.push_back(dt);
3269   return QualType(dt, 0);
3270 }
3271 
3272 /// getUnaryTransformationType - We don't unique these, since the memory
3273 /// savings are minimal and these are rare.
3274 QualType ASTContext::getUnaryTransformType(QualType BaseType,
3275                                            QualType UnderlyingType,
3276                                            UnaryTransformType::UTTKind Kind)
3277     const {
3278   UnaryTransformType *Ty =
3279     new (*this, TypeAlignment) UnaryTransformType (BaseType, UnderlyingType,
3280                                                    Kind,
3281                                  UnderlyingType->isDependentType() ?
3282                                  QualType() : getCanonicalType(UnderlyingType));
3283   Types.push_back(Ty);
3284   return QualType(Ty, 0);
3285 }
3286 
3287 /// getAutoType - We only unique auto types after they've been deduced.
3288 QualType ASTContext::getAutoType(QualType DeducedType) const {
3289   void *InsertPos = 0;
3290   if (!DeducedType.isNull()) {
3291     // Look in the folding set for an existing type.
3292     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3293     AutoType::Profile(ID, DeducedType);
3294     if (AutoType *AT = AutoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3295       return QualType(AT, 0);
3296   }
3297 
3298   AutoType *AT = new (*this, TypeAlignment) AutoType(DeducedType);
3299   Types.push_back(AT);
3300   if (InsertPos)
3301     AutoTypes.InsertNode(AT, InsertPos);
3302   return QualType(AT, 0);
3303 }
3304 
3305 /// getAtomicType - Return the uniqued reference to the atomic type for
3306 /// the given value type.
3307 QualType ASTContext::getAtomicType(QualType T) const {
3308   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
3309   // structure.
3310   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3311   AtomicType::Profile(ID, T);
3312 
3313   void *InsertPos = 0;
3314   if (AtomicType *AT = AtomicTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3315     return QualType(AT, 0);
3316 
3317   // If the atomic value type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
3318   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.
3319   QualType Canonical;
3320   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
3321     Canonical = getAtomicType(getCanonicalType(T));
3322 
3323     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
3324     AtomicType *NewIP = AtomicTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3325     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
3326   }
3327   AtomicType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) AtomicType(T, Canonical);
3328   Types.push_back(New);
3329   AtomicTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
3330   return QualType(New, 0);
3331 }
3332 
3333 /// getAutoDeductType - Get type pattern for deducing against 'auto'.
3334 QualType ASTContext::getAutoDeductType() const {
3335   if (AutoDeductTy.isNull())
3336     AutoDeductTy = getAutoType(QualType());
3337   assert(!AutoDeductTy.isNull() && "can't build 'auto' pattern");
3338   return AutoDeductTy;
3339 }
3340 
3341 /// getAutoRRefDeductType - Get type pattern for deducing against 'auto &&'.
3342 QualType ASTContext::getAutoRRefDeductType() const {
3343   if (AutoRRefDeductTy.isNull())
3344     AutoRRefDeductTy = getRValueReferenceType(getAutoDeductType());
3345   assert(!AutoRRefDeductTy.isNull() && "can't build 'auto &&' pattern");
3346   return AutoRRefDeductTy;
3347 }
3348 
3349 /// getTagDeclType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
3350 /// specified TagDecl (struct/union/class/enum) decl.
3351 QualType ASTContext::getTagDeclType(const TagDecl *Decl) const {
3352   assert (Decl);
3353   // FIXME: What is the design on getTagDeclType when it requires casting
3354   // away const?  mutable?
3355   return getTypeDeclType(const_cast<TagDecl*>(Decl));
3356 }
3357 
3358 /// getSizeType - Return the unique type for "size_t" (C99 7.17), the result
3359 /// of the sizeof operator (C99 6.5.3.4p4). The value is target dependent and
3360 /// needs to agree with the definition in <stddef.h>.
3361 CanQualType ASTContext::getSizeType() const {
3362   return getFromTargetType(Target->getSizeType());
3363 }
3364 
3365 /// getIntMaxType - Return the unique type for "intmax_t" (C99 7.18.1.5).
3366 CanQualType ASTContext::getIntMaxType() const {
3367   return getFromTargetType(Target->getIntMaxType());
3368 }
3369 
3370 /// getUIntMaxType - Return the unique type for "uintmax_t" (C99 7.18.1.5).
3371 CanQualType ASTContext::getUIntMaxType() const {
3372   return getFromTargetType(Target->getUIntMaxType());
3373 }
3374 
3375 /// getSignedWCharType - Return the type of "signed wchar_t".
3376 /// Used when in C++, as a GCC extension.
3377 QualType ASTContext::getSignedWCharType() const {
3378   // FIXME: derive from "Target" ?
3379   return WCharTy;
3380 }
3381 
3382 /// getUnsignedWCharType - Return the type of "unsigned wchar_t".
3383 /// Used when in C++, as a GCC extension.
3384 QualType ASTContext::getUnsignedWCharType() const {
3385   // FIXME: derive from "Target" ?
3386   return UnsignedIntTy;
3387 }
3388 
3389 /// getPointerDiffType - Return the unique type for "ptrdiff_t" (C99 7.17)
3390 /// defined in <stddef.h>. Pointer - pointer requires this (C99 6.5.6p9).
3391 QualType ASTContext::getPointerDiffType() const {
3392   return getFromTargetType(Target->getPtrDiffType(0));
3393 }
3394 
3395 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3396 //                              Type Operators
3397 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3398 
3399 CanQualType ASTContext::getCanonicalParamType(QualType T) const {
3400   // Push qualifiers into arrays, and then discard any remaining
3401   // qualifiers.
3402   T = getCanonicalType(T);
3403   T = getVariableArrayDecayedType(T);
3404   const Type *Ty = T.getTypePtr();
3405   QualType Result;
3406   if (isa<ArrayType>(Ty)) {
3407     Result = getArrayDecayedType(QualType(Ty,0));
3408   } else if (isa<FunctionType>(Ty)) {
3409     Result = getPointerType(QualType(Ty, 0));
3410   } else {
3411     Result = QualType(Ty, 0);
3412   }
3413 
3414   return CanQualType::CreateUnsafe(Result);
3415 }
3416 
3417 QualType ASTContext::getUnqualifiedArrayType(QualType type,
3418                                              Qualifiers &quals) {
3419   SplitQualType splitType = type.getSplitUnqualifiedType();
3420 
3421   // FIXME: getSplitUnqualifiedType() actually walks all the way to
3422   // the unqualified desugared type and then drops it on the floor.
3423   // We then have to strip that sugar back off with
3424   // getUnqualifiedDesugaredType(), which is silly.
3425   const ArrayType *AT =
3426     dyn_cast<ArrayType>(splitType.Ty->getUnqualifiedDesugaredType());
3427 
3428   // If we don't have an array, just use the results in splitType.
3429   if (!AT) {
3430     quals = splitType.Quals;
3431     return QualType(splitType.Ty, 0);
3432   }
3433 
3434   // Otherwise, recurse on the array's element type.
3435   QualType elementType = AT->getElementType();
3436   QualType unqualElementType = getUnqualifiedArrayType(elementType, quals);
3437 
3438   // If that didn't change the element type, AT has no qualifiers, so we
3439   // can just use the results in splitType.
3440   if (elementType == unqualElementType) {
3441     assert(quals.empty()); // from the recursive call
3442     quals = splitType.Quals;
3443     return QualType(splitType.Ty, 0);
3444   }
3445 
3446   // Otherwise, add in the qualifiers from the outermost type, then
3447   // build the type back up.
3448   quals.addConsistentQualifiers(splitType.Quals);
3449 
3450   if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) {
3451     return getConstantArrayType(unqualElementType, CAT->getSize(),
3452                                 CAT->getSizeModifier(), 0);
3453   }
3454 
3455   if (const IncompleteArrayType *IAT = dyn_cast<IncompleteArrayType>(AT)) {
3456     return getIncompleteArrayType(unqualElementType, IAT->getSizeModifier(), 0);
3457   }
3458 
3459   if (const VariableArrayType *VAT = dyn_cast<VariableArrayType>(AT)) {
3460     return getVariableArrayType(unqualElementType,
3461                                 VAT->getSizeExpr(),
3462                                 VAT->getSizeModifier(),
3463                                 VAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
3464                                 VAT->getBracketsRange());
3465   }
3466 
3467   const DependentSizedArrayType *DSAT = cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(AT);
3468   return getDependentSizedArrayType(unqualElementType, DSAT->getSizeExpr(),
3469                                     DSAT->getSizeModifier(), 0,
3470                                     SourceRange());
3471 }
3472 
3473 /// UnwrapSimilarPointerTypes - If T1 and T2 are pointer types  that
3474 /// may be similar (C++ 4.4), replaces T1 and T2 with the type that
3475 /// they point to and return true. If T1 and T2 aren't pointer types
3476 /// or pointer-to-member types, or if they are not similar at this
3477 /// level, returns false and leaves T1 and T2 unchanged. Top-level
3478 /// qualifiers on T1 and T2 are ignored. This function will typically
3479 /// be called in a loop that successively "unwraps" pointer and
3480 /// pointer-to-member types to compare them at each level.
3481 bool ASTContext::UnwrapSimilarPointerTypes(QualType &T1, QualType &T2) {
3482   const PointerType *T1PtrType = T1->getAs<PointerType>(),
3483                     *T2PtrType = T2->getAs<PointerType>();
3484   if (T1PtrType && T2PtrType) {
3485     T1 = T1PtrType->getPointeeType();
3486     T2 = T2PtrType->getPointeeType();
3487     return true;
3488   }
3489 
3490   const MemberPointerType *T1MPType = T1->getAs<MemberPointerType>(),
3491                           *T2MPType = T2->getAs<MemberPointerType>();
3492   if (T1MPType && T2MPType &&
3493       hasSameUnqualifiedType(QualType(T1MPType->getClass(), 0),
3494                              QualType(T2MPType->getClass(), 0))) {
3495     T1 = T1MPType->getPointeeType();
3496     T2 = T2MPType->getPointeeType();
3497     return true;
3498   }
3499 
3500   if (getLangOpts().ObjC1) {
3501     const ObjCObjectPointerType *T1OPType = T1->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
3502                                 *T2OPType = T2->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
3503     if (T1OPType && T2OPType) {
3504       T1 = T1OPType->getPointeeType();
3505       T2 = T2OPType->getPointeeType();
3506       return true;
3507     }
3508   }
3509 
3510   // FIXME: Block pointers, too?
3511 
3512   return false;
3513 }
3514 
3515 DeclarationNameInfo
3516 ASTContext::getNameForTemplate(TemplateName Name,
3517                                SourceLocation NameLoc) const {
3518   switch (Name.getKind()) {
3519   case TemplateName::QualifiedTemplate:
3520   case TemplateName::Template:
3521     // DNInfo work in progress: CHECKME: what about DNLoc?
3522     return DeclarationNameInfo(Name.getAsTemplateDecl()->getDeclName(),
3523                                NameLoc);
3524 
3525   case TemplateName::OverloadedTemplate: {
3526     OverloadedTemplateStorage *Storage = Name.getAsOverloadedTemplate();
3527     // DNInfo work in progress: CHECKME: what about DNLoc?
3528     return DeclarationNameInfo((*Storage->begin())->getDeclName(), NameLoc);
3529   }
3530 
3531   case TemplateName::DependentTemplate: {
3532     DependentTemplateName *DTN = Name.getAsDependentTemplateName();
3533     DeclarationName DName;
3534     if (DTN->isIdentifier()) {
3535       DName = DeclarationNames.getIdentifier(DTN->getIdentifier());
3536       return DeclarationNameInfo(DName, NameLoc);
3537     } else {
3538       DName = DeclarationNames.getCXXOperatorName(DTN->getOperator());
3539       // DNInfo work in progress: FIXME: source locations?
3540       DeclarationNameLoc DNLoc;
3541       DNLoc.CXXOperatorName.BeginOpNameLoc = SourceLocation().getRawEncoding();
3542       DNLoc.CXXOperatorName.EndOpNameLoc = SourceLocation().getRawEncoding();
3543       return DeclarationNameInfo(DName, NameLoc, DNLoc);
3544     }
3545   }
3546 
3547   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParm: {
3548     SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst
3549       = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParm();
3550     return DeclarationNameInfo(subst->getParameter()->getDeclName(),
3551                                NameLoc);
3552   }
3553 
3554   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParmPack: {
3555     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *subst
3556       = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack();
3557     return DeclarationNameInfo(subst->getParameterPack()->getDeclName(),
3558                                NameLoc);
3559   }
3560   }
3561 
3562   llvm_unreachable("bad template name kind!");
3563 }
3564 
3565 TemplateName ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateName(TemplateName Name) const {
3566   switch (Name.getKind()) {
3567   case TemplateName::QualifiedTemplate:
3568   case TemplateName::Template: {
3569     TemplateDecl *Template = Name.getAsTemplateDecl();
3570     if (TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP
3571           = dyn_cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(Template))
3572       Template = getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(TTP);
3573 
3574     // The canonical template name is the canonical template declaration.
3575     return TemplateName(cast<TemplateDecl>(Template->getCanonicalDecl()));
3576   }
3577 
3578   case TemplateName::OverloadedTemplate:
3579     llvm_unreachable("cannot canonicalize overloaded template");
3580 
3581   case TemplateName::DependentTemplate: {
3582     DependentTemplateName *DTN = Name.getAsDependentTemplateName();
3583     assert(DTN && "Non-dependent template names must refer to template decls.");
3584     return DTN->CanonicalTemplateName;
3585   }
3586 
3587   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParm: {
3588     SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst
3589       = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParm();
3590     return getCanonicalTemplateName(subst->getReplacement());
3591   }
3592 
3593   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParmPack: {
3594     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *subst
3595                                   = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack();
3596     TemplateTemplateParmDecl *canonParameter
3597       = getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(subst->getParameterPack());
3598     TemplateArgument canonArgPack
3599       = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(subst->getArgumentPack());
3600     return getSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(canonParameter, canonArgPack);
3601   }
3602   }
3603 
3604   llvm_unreachable("bad template name!");
3605 }
3606 
3607 bool ASTContext::hasSameTemplateName(TemplateName X, TemplateName Y) {
3608   X = getCanonicalTemplateName(X);
3609   Y = getCanonicalTemplateName(Y);
3610   return X.getAsVoidPointer() == Y.getAsVoidPointer();
3611 }
3612 
3613 TemplateArgument
3614 ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateArgument(const TemplateArgument &Arg) const {
3615   switch (Arg.getKind()) {
3616     case TemplateArgument::Null:
3617       return Arg;
3618 
3619     case TemplateArgument::Expression:
3620       return Arg;
3621 
3622     case TemplateArgument::Declaration: {
3623       if (Decl *D = Arg.getAsDecl())
3624           return TemplateArgument(D->getCanonicalDecl());
3625       return TemplateArgument((Decl*)0);
3626     }
3627 
3628     case TemplateArgument::Template:
3629       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalTemplateName(Arg.getAsTemplate()));
3630 
3631     case TemplateArgument::TemplateExpansion:
3632       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalTemplateName(
3633                                          Arg.getAsTemplateOrTemplatePattern()),
3634                               Arg.getNumTemplateExpansions());
3635 
3636     case TemplateArgument::Integral:
3637       return TemplateArgument(Arg, getCanonicalType(Arg.getIntegralType()));
3638 
3639     case TemplateArgument::Type:
3640       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalType(Arg.getAsType()));
3641 
3642     case TemplateArgument::Pack: {
3643       if (Arg.pack_size() == 0)
3644         return Arg;
3645 
3646       TemplateArgument *CanonArgs
3647         = new (*this) TemplateArgument[Arg.pack_size()];
3648       unsigned Idx = 0;
3649       for (TemplateArgument::pack_iterator A = Arg.pack_begin(),
3650                                         AEnd = Arg.pack_end();
3651            A != AEnd; (void)++A, ++Idx)
3652         CanonArgs[Idx] = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(*A);
3653 
3654       return TemplateArgument(CanonArgs, Arg.pack_size());
3655     }
3656   }
3657 
3658   // Silence GCC warning
3659   llvm_unreachable("Unhandled template argument kind");
3660 }
3661 
3662 NestedNameSpecifier *
3663 ASTContext::getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS) const {
3664   if (!NNS)
3665     return 0;
3666 
3667   switch (NNS->getKind()) {
3668   case NestedNameSpecifier::Identifier:
3669     // Canonicalize the prefix but keep the identifier the same.
3670     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this,
3671                          getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS->getPrefix()),
3672                                        NNS->getAsIdentifier());
3673 
3674   case NestedNameSpecifier::Namespace:
3675     // A namespace is canonical; build a nested-name-specifier with
3676     // this namespace and no prefix.
3677     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0,
3678                                  NNS->getAsNamespace()->getOriginalNamespace());
3679 
3680   case NestedNameSpecifier::NamespaceAlias:
3681     // A namespace is canonical; build a nested-name-specifier with
3682     // this namespace and no prefix.
3683     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0,
3684                                     NNS->getAsNamespaceAlias()->getNamespace()
3685                                                       ->getOriginalNamespace());
3686 
3687   case NestedNameSpecifier::TypeSpec:
3688   case NestedNameSpecifier::TypeSpecWithTemplate: {
3689     QualType T = getCanonicalType(QualType(NNS->getAsType(), 0));
3690 
3691     // If we have some kind of dependent-named type (e.g., "typename T::type"),
3692     // break it apart into its prefix and identifier, then reconsititute those
3693     // as the canonical nested-name-specifier. This is required to canonicalize
3694     // a dependent nested-name-specifier involving typedefs of dependent-name
3695     // types, e.g.,
3696     //   typedef typename T::type T1;
3697     //   typedef typename T1::type T2;
3698     if (const DependentNameType *DNT = T->getAs<DependentNameType>())
3699       return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, DNT->getQualifier(),
3700                            const_cast<IdentifierInfo *>(DNT->getIdentifier()));
3701 
3702     // Otherwise, just canonicalize the type, and force it to be a TypeSpec.
3703     // FIXME: Why are TypeSpec and TypeSpecWithTemplate distinct in the
3704     // first place?
3705     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0, false,
3706                                        const_cast<Type*>(T.getTypePtr()));
3707   }
3708 
3709   case NestedNameSpecifier::Global:
3710     // The global specifier is canonical and unique.
3711     return NNS;
3712   }
3713 
3714   llvm_unreachable("Invalid NestedNameSpecifier::Kind!");
3715 }
3716 
3717 
3718 const ArrayType *ASTContext::getAsArrayType(QualType T) const {
3719   // Handle the non-qualified case efficiently.
3720   if (!T.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
3721     // Handle the common positive case fast.
3722     if (const ArrayType *AT = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(T))
3723       return AT;
3724   }
3725 
3726   // Handle the common negative case fast.
3727   if (!isa<ArrayType>(T.getCanonicalType()))
3728     return 0;
3729 
3730   // Apply any qualifiers from the array type to the element type.  This
3731   // implements C99 6.7.3p8: "If the specification of an array type includes
3732   // any type qualifiers, the element type is so qualified, not the array type."
3733 
3734   // If we get here, we either have type qualifiers on the type, or we have
3735   // sugar such as a typedef in the way.  If we have type qualifiers on the type
3736   // we must propagate them down into the element type.
3737 
3738   SplitQualType split = T.getSplitDesugaredType();
3739   Qualifiers qs = split.Quals;
3740 
3741   // If we have a simple case, just return now.
3742   const ArrayType *ATy = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(split.Ty);
3743   if (ATy == 0 || qs.empty())
3744     return ATy;
3745 
3746   // Otherwise, we have an array and we have qualifiers on it.  Push the
3747   // qualifiers into the array element type and return a new array type.
3748   QualType NewEltTy = getQualifiedType(ATy->getElementType(), qs);
3749 
3750   if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(ATy))
3751     return cast<ArrayType>(getConstantArrayType(NewEltTy, CAT->getSize(),
3752                                                 CAT->getSizeModifier(),
3753                                            CAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers()));
3754   if (const IncompleteArrayType *IAT = dyn_cast<IncompleteArrayType>(ATy))
3755     return cast<ArrayType>(getIncompleteArrayType(NewEltTy,
3756                                                   IAT->getSizeModifier(),
3757                                            IAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers()));
3758 
3759   if (const DependentSizedArrayType *DSAT
3760         = dyn_cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(ATy))
3761     return cast<ArrayType>(
3762                      getDependentSizedArrayType(NewEltTy,
3763                                                 DSAT->getSizeExpr(),
3764                                                 DSAT->getSizeModifier(),
3765                                               DSAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
3766                                                 DSAT->getBracketsRange()));
3767 
3768   const VariableArrayType *VAT = cast<VariableArrayType>(ATy);
3769   return cast<ArrayType>(getVariableArrayType(NewEltTy,
3770                                               VAT->getSizeExpr(),
3771                                               VAT->getSizeModifier(),
3772                                               VAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
3773                                               VAT->getBracketsRange()));
3774 }
3775 
3776 QualType ASTContext::getAdjustedParameterType(QualType T) const {
3777   // C99 6.7.5.3p7:
3778   //   A declaration of a parameter as "array of type" shall be
3779   //   adjusted to "qualified pointer to type", where the type
3780   //   qualifiers (if any) are those specified within the [ and ] of
3781   //   the array type derivation.
3782   if (T->isArrayType())
3783     return getArrayDecayedType(T);
3784 
3785   // C99 6.7.5.3p8:
3786   //   A declaration of a parameter as "function returning type"
3787   //   shall be adjusted to "pointer to function returning type", as
3788   //   in 6.3.2.1.
3789   if (T->isFunctionType())
3790     return getPointerType(T);
3791 
3792   return T;
3793 }
3794 
3795 QualType ASTContext::getSignatureParameterType(QualType T) const {
3796   T = getVariableArrayDecayedType(T);
3797   T = getAdjustedParameterType(T);
3798   return T.getUnqualifiedType();
3799 }
3800 
3801 /// getArrayDecayedType - Return the properly qualified result of decaying the
3802 /// specified array type to a pointer.  This operation is non-trivial when
3803 /// handling typedefs etc.  The canonical type of "T" must be an array type,
3804 /// this returns a pointer to a properly qualified element of the array.
3805 ///
3806 /// See C99 6.7.5.3p7 and C99 6.3.2.1p3.
3807 QualType ASTContext::getArrayDecayedType(QualType Ty) const {
3808   // Get the element type with 'getAsArrayType' so that we don't lose any
3809   // typedefs in the element type of the array.  This also handles propagation
3810   // of type qualifiers from the array type into the element type if present
3811   // (C99 6.7.3p8).
3812   const ArrayType *PrettyArrayType = getAsArrayType(Ty);
3813   assert(PrettyArrayType && "Not an array type!");
3814 
3815   QualType PtrTy = getPointerType(PrettyArrayType->getElementType());
3816 
3817   // int x[restrict 4] ->  int *restrict
3818   return getQualifiedType(PtrTy, PrettyArrayType->getIndexTypeQualifiers());
3819 }
3820 
3821 QualType ASTContext::getBaseElementType(const ArrayType *array) const {
3822   return getBaseElementType(array->getElementType());
3823 }
3824 
3825 QualType ASTContext::getBaseElementType(QualType type) const {
3826   Qualifiers qs;
3827   while (true) {
3828     SplitQualType split = type.getSplitDesugaredType();
3829     const ArrayType *array = split.Ty->getAsArrayTypeUnsafe();
3830     if (!array) break;
3831 
3832     type = array->getElementType();
3833     qs.addConsistentQualifiers(split.Quals);
3834   }
3835 
3836   return getQualifiedType(type, qs);
3837 }
3838 
3839 /// getConstantArrayElementCount - Returns number of constant array elements.
3840 uint64_t
3841 ASTContext::getConstantArrayElementCount(const ConstantArrayType *CA)  const {
3842   uint64_t ElementCount = 1;
3843   do {
3844     ElementCount *= CA->getSize().getZExtValue();
3845     CA = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(CA->getElementType());
3846   } while (CA);
3847   return ElementCount;
3848 }
3849 
3850 /// getFloatingRank - Return a relative rank for floating point types.
3851 /// This routine will assert if passed a built-in type that isn't a float.
3852 static FloatingRank getFloatingRank(QualType T) {
3853   if (const ComplexType *CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>())
3854     return getFloatingRank(CT->getElementType());
3855 
3856   assert(T->getAs<BuiltinType>() && "getFloatingRank(): not a floating type");
3857   switch (T->getAs<BuiltinType>()->getKind()) {
3858   default: llvm_unreachable("getFloatingRank(): not a floating type");
3859   case BuiltinType::Half:       return HalfRank;
3860   case BuiltinType::Float:      return FloatRank;
3861   case BuiltinType::Double:     return DoubleRank;
3862   case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return LongDoubleRank;
3863   }
3864 }
3865 
3866 /// getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain - Returns a real floating
3867 /// point or a complex type (based on typeDomain/typeSize).
3868 /// 'typeDomain' is a real floating point or complex type.
3869 /// 'typeSize' is a real floating point or complex type.
3870 QualType ASTContext::getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain(QualType Size,
3871                                                        QualType Domain) const {
3872   FloatingRank EltRank = getFloatingRank(Size);
3873   if (Domain->isComplexType()) {
3874     switch (EltRank) {
3875     case HalfRank: llvm_unreachable("Complex half is not supported");
3876     case FloatRank:      return FloatComplexTy;
3877     case DoubleRank:     return DoubleComplexTy;
3878     case LongDoubleRank: return LongDoubleComplexTy;
3879     }
3880   }
3881 
3882   assert(Domain->isRealFloatingType() && "Unknown domain!");
3883   switch (EltRank) {
3884   case HalfRank: llvm_unreachable("Half ranks are not valid here");
3885   case FloatRank:      return FloatTy;
3886   case DoubleRank:     return DoubleTy;
3887   case LongDoubleRank: return LongDoubleTy;
3888   }
3889   llvm_unreachable("getFloatingRank(): illegal value for rank");
3890 }
3891 
3892 /// getFloatingTypeOrder - Compare the rank of the two specified floating
3893 /// point types, ignoring the domain of the type (i.e. 'double' ==
3894 /// '_Complex double').  If LHS > RHS, return 1.  If LHS == RHS, return 0. If
3895 /// LHS < RHS, return -1.
3896 int ASTContext::getFloatingTypeOrder(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) const {
3897   FloatingRank LHSR = getFloatingRank(LHS);
3898   FloatingRank RHSR = getFloatingRank(RHS);
3899 
3900   if (LHSR == RHSR)
3901     return 0;
3902   if (LHSR > RHSR)
3903     return 1;
3904   return -1;
3905 }
3906 
3907 /// getIntegerRank - Return an integer conversion rank (C99 6.3.1.1p1). This
3908 /// routine will assert if passed a built-in type that isn't an integer or enum,
3909 /// or if it is not canonicalized.
3910 unsigned ASTContext::getIntegerRank(const Type *T) const {
3911   assert(T->isCanonicalUnqualified() && "T should be canonicalized");
3912 
3913   switch (cast<BuiltinType>(T)->getKind()) {
3914   default: llvm_unreachable("getIntegerRank(): not a built-in integer");
3915   case BuiltinType::Bool:
3916     return 1 + (getIntWidth(BoolTy) << 3);
3917   case BuiltinType::Char_S:
3918   case BuiltinType::Char_U:
3919   case BuiltinType::SChar:
3920   case BuiltinType::UChar:
3921     return 2 + (getIntWidth(CharTy) << 3);
3922   case BuiltinType::Short:
3923   case BuiltinType::UShort:
3924     return 3 + (getIntWidth(ShortTy) << 3);
3925   case BuiltinType::Int:
3926   case BuiltinType::UInt:
3927     return 4 + (getIntWidth(IntTy) << 3);
3928   case BuiltinType::Long:
3929   case BuiltinType::ULong:
3930     return 5 + (getIntWidth(LongTy) << 3);
3931   case BuiltinType::LongLong:
3932   case BuiltinType::ULongLong:
3933     return 6 + (getIntWidth(LongLongTy) << 3);
3934   case BuiltinType::Int128:
3935   case BuiltinType::UInt128:
3936     return 7 + (getIntWidth(Int128Ty) << 3);
3937   }
3938 }
3939 
3940 /// \brief Whether this is a promotable bitfield reference according
3941 /// to C99 6.3.1.1p2, bullet 2 (and GCC extensions).
3942 ///
3943 /// \returns the type this bit-field will promote to, or NULL if no
3944 /// promotion occurs.
3945 QualType ASTContext::isPromotableBitField(Expr *E) const {
3946   if (E->isTypeDependent() || E->isValueDependent())
3947     return QualType();
3948 
3949   FieldDecl *Field = E->getBitField();
3950   if (!Field)
3951     return QualType();
3952 
3953   QualType FT = Field->getType();
3954 
3955   uint64_t BitWidth = Field->getBitWidthValue(*this);
3956   uint64_t IntSize = getTypeSize(IntTy);
3957   // GCC extension compatibility: if the bit-field size is less than or equal
3958   // to the size of int, it gets promoted no matter what its type is.
3959   // For instance, unsigned long bf : 4 gets promoted to signed int.
3960   if (BitWidth < IntSize)
3961     return IntTy;
3962 
3963   if (BitWidth == IntSize)
3964     return FT->isSignedIntegerType() ? IntTy : UnsignedIntTy;
3965 
3966   // Types bigger than int are not subject to promotions, and therefore act
3967   // like the base type.
3968   // FIXME: This doesn't quite match what gcc does, but what gcc does here
3969   // is ridiculous.
3970   return QualType();
3971 }
3972 
3973 /// getPromotedIntegerType - Returns the type that Promotable will
3974 /// promote to: C99 6.3.1.1p2, assuming that Promotable is a promotable
3975 /// integer type.
3976 QualType ASTContext::getPromotedIntegerType(QualType Promotable) const {
3977   assert(!Promotable.isNull());
3978   assert(Promotable->isPromotableIntegerType());
3979   if (const EnumType *ET = Promotable->getAs<EnumType>())
3980     return ET->getDecl()->getPromotionType();
3981 
3982   if (const BuiltinType *BT = Promotable->getAs<BuiltinType>()) {
3983     // C++ [conv.prom]: A prvalue of type char16_t, char32_t, or wchar_t
3984     // (3.9.1) can be converted to a prvalue of the first of the following
3985     // types that can represent all the values of its underlying type:
3986     // int, unsigned int, long int, unsigned long int, long long int, or
3987     // unsigned long long int [...]
3988     // FIXME: Is there some better way to compute this?
3989     if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_S ||
3990         BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_U ||
3991         BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Char16 ||
3992         BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Char32) {
3993       bool FromIsSigned = BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_S;
3994       uint64_t FromSize = getTypeSize(BT);
3995       QualType PromoteTypes[] = { IntTy, UnsignedIntTy, LongTy, UnsignedLongTy,
3996                                   LongLongTy, UnsignedLongLongTy };
3997       for (size_t Idx = 0; Idx < llvm::array_lengthof(PromoteTypes); ++Idx) {
3998         uint64_t ToSize = getTypeSize(PromoteTypes[Idx]);
3999         if (FromSize < ToSize ||
4000             (FromSize == ToSize &&
4001              FromIsSigned == PromoteTypes[Idx]->isSignedIntegerType()))
4002           return PromoteTypes[Idx];
4003       }
4004       llvm_unreachable("char type should fit into long long");
4005     }
4006   }
4007 
4008   // At this point, we should have a signed or unsigned integer type.
4009   if (Promotable->isSignedIntegerType())
4010     return IntTy;
4011   uint64_t PromotableSize = getTypeSize(Promotable);
4012   uint64_t IntSize = getTypeSize(IntTy);
4013   assert(Promotable->isUnsignedIntegerType() && PromotableSize <= IntSize);
4014   return (PromotableSize != IntSize) ? IntTy : UnsignedIntTy;
4015 }
4016 
4017 /// \brief Recurses in pointer/array types until it finds an objc retainable
4018 /// type and returns its ownership.
4019 Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime ASTContext::getInnerObjCOwnership(QualType T) const {
4020   while (!T.isNull()) {
4021     if (T.getObjCLifetime() != Qualifiers::OCL_None)
4022       return T.getObjCLifetime();
4023     if (T->isArrayType())
4024       T = getBaseElementType(T);
4025     else if (const PointerType *PT = T->getAs<PointerType>())
4026       T = PT->getPointeeType();
4027     else if (const ReferenceType *RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>())
4028       T = RT->getPointeeType();
4029     else
4030       break;
4031   }
4032 
4033   return Qualifiers::OCL_None;
4034 }
4035 
4036 /// getIntegerTypeOrder - Returns the highest ranked integer type:
4037 /// C99 6.3.1.8p1.  If LHS > RHS, return 1.  If LHS == RHS, return 0. If
4038 /// LHS < RHS, return -1.
4039 int ASTContext::getIntegerTypeOrder(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) const {
4040   const Type *LHSC = getCanonicalType(LHS).getTypePtr();
4041   const Type *RHSC = getCanonicalType(RHS).getTypePtr();
4042   if (LHSC == RHSC) return 0;
4043 
4044   bool LHSUnsigned = LHSC->isUnsignedIntegerType();
4045   bool RHSUnsigned = RHSC->isUnsignedIntegerType();
4046 
4047   unsigned LHSRank = getIntegerRank(LHSC);
4048   unsigned RHSRank = getIntegerRank(RHSC);
4049 
4050   if (LHSUnsigned == RHSUnsigned) {  // Both signed or both unsigned.
4051     if (LHSRank == RHSRank) return 0;
4052     return LHSRank > RHSRank ? 1 : -1;
4053   }
4054 
4055   // Otherwise, the LHS is signed and the RHS is unsigned or visa versa.
4056   if (LHSUnsigned) {
4057     // If the unsigned [LHS] type is larger, return it.
4058     if (LHSRank >= RHSRank)
4059       return 1;
4060 
4061     // If the signed type can represent all values of the unsigned type, it
4062     // wins.  Because we are dealing with 2's complement and types that are
4063     // powers of two larger than each other, this is always safe.
4064     return -1;
4065   }
4066 
4067   // If the unsigned [RHS] type is larger, return it.
4068   if (RHSRank >= LHSRank)
4069     return -1;
4070 
4071   // If the signed type can represent all values of the unsigned type, it
4072   // wins.  Because we are dealing with 2's complement and types that are
4073   // powers of two larger than each other, this is always safe.
4074   return 1;
4075 }
4076 
4077 static RecordDecl *
4078 CreateRecordDecl(const ASTContext &Ctx, RecordDecl::TagKind TK,
4079                  DeclContext *DC, IdentifierInfo *Id) {
4080   SourceLocation Loc;
4081   if (Ctx.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
4082     return CXXRecordDecl::Create(Ctx, TK, DC, Loc, Loc, Id);
4083   else
4084     return RecordDecl::Create(Ctx, TK, DC, Loc, Loc, Id);
4085 }
4086 
4087 // getCFConstantStringType - Return the type used for constant CFStrings.
4088 QualType ASTContext::getCFConstantStringType() const {
4089   if (!CFConstantStringTypeDecl) {
4090     CFConstantStringTypeDecl =
4091       CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl,
4092                        &Idents.get("NSConstantString"));
4093     CFConstantStringTypeDecl->startDefinition();
4094 
4095     QualType FieldTypes[4];
4096 
4097     // const int *isa;
4098     FieldTypes[0] = getPointerType(IntTy.withConst());
4099     // int flags;
4100     FieldTypes[1] = IntTy;
4101     // const char *str;
4102     FieldTypes[2] = getPointerType(CharTy.withConst());
4103     // long length;
4104     FieldTypes[3] = LongTy;
4105 
4106     // Create fields
4107     for (unsigned i = 0; i < 4; ++i) {
4108       FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, CFConstantStringTypeDecl,
4109                                            SourceLocation(),
4110                                            SourceLocation(), 0,
4111                                            FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4112                                            /*BitWidth=*/0,
4113                                            /*Mutable=*/false,
4114                                            ICIS_NoInit);
4115       Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4116       CFConstantStringTypeDecl->addDecl(Field);
4117     }
4118 
4119     CFConstantStringTypeDecl->completeDefinition();
4120   }
4121 
4122   return getTagDeclType(CFConstantStringTypeDecl);
4123 }
4124 
4125 void ASTContext::setCFConstantStringType(QualType T) {
4126   const RecordType *Rec = T->getAs<RecordType>();
4127   assert(Rec && "Invalid CFConstantStringType");
4128   CFConstantStringTypeDecl = Rec->getDecl();
4129 }
4130 
4131 QualType ASTContext::getBlockDescriptorType() const {
4132   if (BlockDescriptorType)
4133     return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorType);
4134 
4135   RecordDecl *T;
4136   // FIXME: Needs the FlagAppleBlock bit.
4137   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl,
4138                        &Idents.get("__block_descriptor"));
4139   T->startDefinition();
4140 
4141   QualType FieldTypes[] = {
4142     UnsignedLongTy,
4143     UnsignedLongTy,
4144   };
4145 
4146   const char *FieldNames[] = {
4147     "reserved",
4148     "Size"
4149   };
4150 
4151   for (size_t i = 0; i < 2; ++i) {
4152     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(),
4153                                          SourceLocation(),
4154                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
4155                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4156                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
4157                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
4158                                          ICIS_NoInit);
4159     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4160     T->addDecl(Field);
4161   }
4162 
4163   T->completeDefinition();
4164 
4165   BlockDescriptorType = T;
4166 
4167   return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorType);
4168 }
4169 
4170 QualType ASTContext::getBlockDescriptorExtendedType() const {
4171   if (BlockDescriptorExtendedType)
4172     return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorExtendedType);
4173 
4174   RecordDecl *T;
4175   // FIXME: Needs the FlagAppleBlock bit.
4176   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl,
4177                        &Idents.get("__block_descriptor_withcopydispose"));
4178   T->startDefinition();
4179 
4180   QualType FieldTypes[] = {
4181     UnsignedLongTy,
4182     UnsignedLongTy,
4183     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy),
4184     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy)
4185   };
4186 
4187   const char *FieldNames[] = {
4188     "reserved",
4189     "Size",
4190     "CopyFuncPtr",
4191     "DestroyFuncPtr"
4192   };
4193 
4194   for (size_t i = 0; i < 4; ++i) {
4195     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(),
4196                                          SourceLocation(),
4197                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
4198                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4199                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
4200                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
4201                                          ICIS_NoInit);
4202     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4203     T->addDecl(Field);
4204   }
4205 
4206   T->completeDefinition();
4207 
4208   BlockDescriptorExtendedType = T;
4209 
4210   return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorExtendedType);
4211 }
4212 
4213 bool ASTContext::BlockRequiresCopying(QualType Ty) const {
4214   if (Ty->isObjCRetainableType())
4215     return true;
4216   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) {
4217     if (const RecordType *RT = Ty->getAs<RecordType>()) {
4218       CXXRecordDecl *RD = cast<CXXRecordDecl>(RT->getDecl());
4219       return RD->hasConstCopyConstructor();
4220 
4221     }
4222   }
4223   return false;
4224 }
4225 
4226 QualType
4227 ASTContext::BuildByRefType(StringRef DeclName, QualType Ty) const {
4228   //  type = struct __Block_byref_1_X {
4229   //    void *__isa;
4230   //    struct __Block_byref_1_X *__forwarding;
4231   //    unsigned int __flags;
4232   //    unsigned int __size;
4233   //    void *__copy_helper;            // as needed
4234   //    void *__destroy_help            // as needed
4235   //    int X;
4236   //  } *
4237 
4238   bool HasCopyAndDispose = BlockRequiresCopying(Ty);
4239 
4240   // FIXME: Move up
4241   SmallString<36> Name;
4242   llvm::raw_svector_ostream(Name) << "__Block_byref_" <<
4243                                   ++UniqueBlockByRefTypeID << '_' << DeclName;
4244   RecordDecl *T;
4245   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl, &Idents.get(Name.str()));
4246   T->startDefinition();
4247   QualType Int32Ty = IntTy;
4248   assert(getIntWidth(IntTy) == 32 && "non-32bit int not supported");
4249   QualType FieldTypes[] = {
4250     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy),
4251     getPointerType(getTagDeclType(T)),
4252     Int32Ty,
4253     Int32Ty,
4254     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy),
4255     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy),
4256     Ty
4257   };
4258 
4259   StringRef FieldNames[] = {
4260     "__isa",
4261     "__forwarding",
4262     "__flags",
4263     "__size",
4264     "__copy_helper",
4265     "__destroy_helper",
4266     DeclName,
4267   };
4268 
4269   for (size_t i = 0; i < 7; ++i) {
4270     if (!HasCopyAndDispose && i >=4 && i <= 5)
4271       continue;
4272     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(),
4273                                          SourceLocation(),
4274                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
4275                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4276                                          /*BitWidth=*/0, /*Mutable=*/false,
4277                                          ICIS_NoInit);
4278     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4279     T->addDecl(Field);
4280   }
4281 
4282   T->completeDefinition();
4283 
4284   return getPointerType(getTagDeclType(T));
4285 }
4286 
4287 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCInstanceTypeDecl() {
4288   if (!ObjCInstanceTypeDecl)
4289     ObjCInstanceTypeDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(*this,
4290                                                getTranslationUnitDecl(),
4291                                                SourceLocation(),
4292                                                SourceLocation(),
4293                                                &Idents.get("instancetype"),
4294                                      getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(getObjCIdType()));
4295   return ObjCInstanceTypeDecl;
4296 }
4297 
4298 // This returns true if a type has been typedefed to BOOL:
4299 // typedef <type> BOOL;
4300 static bool isTypeTypedefedAsBOOL(QualType T) {
4301   if (const TypedefType *TT = dyn_cast<TypedefType>(T))
4302     if (IdentifierInfo *II = TT->getDecl()->getIdentifier())
4303       return II->isStr("BOOL");
4304 
4305   return false;
4306 }
4307 
4308 /// getObjCEncodingTypeSize returns size of type for objective-c encoding
4309 /// purpose.
4310 CharUnits ASTContext::getObjCEncodingTypeSize(QualType type) const {
4311   if (!type->isIncompleteArrayType() && type->isIncompleteType())
4312     return CharUnits::Zero();
4313 
4314   CharUnits sz = getTypeSizeInChars(type);
4315 
4316   // Make all integer and enum types at least as large as an int
4317   if (sz.isPositive() && type->isIntegralOrEnumerationType())
4318     sz = std::max(sz, getTypeSizeInChars(IntTy));
4319   // Treat arrays as pointers, since that's how they're passed in.
4320   else if (type->isArrayType())
4321     sz = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy);
4322   return sz;
4323 }
4324 
4325 static inline
4326 std::string charUnitsToString(const CharUnits &CU) {
4327   return llvm::itostr(CU.getQuantity());
4328 }
4329 
4330 /// getObjCEncodingForBlock - Return the encoded type for this block
4331 /// declaration.
4332 std::string ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForBlock(const BlockExpr *Expr) const {
4333   std::string S;
4334 
4335   const BlockDecl *Decl = Expr->getBlockDecl();
4336   QualType BlockTy =
4337       Expr->getType()->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
4338   // Encode result type.
4339   getObjCEncodingForType(BlockTy->getAs<FunctionType>()->getResultType(), S);
4340   // Compute size of all parameters.
4341   // Start with computing size of a pointer in number of bytes.
4342   // FIXME: There might(should) be a better way of doing this computation!
4343   SourceLocation Loc;
4344   CharUnits PtrSize = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy);
4345   CharUnits ParmOffset = PtrSize;
4346   for (BlockDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4347        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4348     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType();
4349     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4350     if (sz.isZero())
4351       continue;
4352     assert (sz.isPositive() && "BlockExpr - Incomplete param type");
4353     ParmOffset += sz;
4354   }
4355   // Size of the argument frame
4356   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4357   // Block pointer and offset.
4358   S += "@?0";
4359 
4360   // Argument types.
4361   ParmOffset = PtrSize;
4362   for (BlockDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), E =
4363        Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4364     ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI;
4365     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType();
4366     if (const ArrayType *AT =
4367           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4368       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of
4369       // elements.
4370       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT))
4371         PType = PVDecl->getType();
4372     } else if (PType->isFunctionType())
4373       PType = PVDecl->getType();
4374     getObjCEncodingForType(PType, S);
4375     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4376     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4377   }
4378 
4379   return S;
4380 }
4381 
4382 bool ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForFunctionDecl(const FunctionDecl *Decl,
4383                                                 std::string& S) {
4384   // Encode result type.
4385   getObjCEncodingForType(Decl->getResultType(), S);
4386   CharUnits ParmOffset;
4387   // Compute size of all parameters.
4388   for (FunctionDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4389        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4390     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType();
4391     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4392     if (sz.isZero())
4393       continue;
4394 
4395     assert (sz.isPositive() &&
4396         "getObjCEncodingForFunctionDecl - Incomplete param type");
4397     ParmOffset += sz;
4398   }
4399   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4400   ParmOffset = CharUnits::Zero();
4401 
4402   // Argument types.
4403   for (FunctionDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4404        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4405     ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI;
4406     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType();
4407     if (const ArrayType *AT =
4408           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4409       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of
4410       // elements.
4411       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT))
4412         PType = PVDecl->getType();
4413     } else if (PType->isFunctionType())
4414       PType = PVDecl->getType();
4415     getObjCEncodingForType(PType, S);
4416     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4417     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4418   }
4419 
4420   return false;
4421 }
4422 
4423 /// getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter - Return the encoded type for a single
4424 /// method parameter or return type. If Extended, include class names and
4425 /// block object types.
4426 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl::ObjCDeclQualifier QT,
4427                                                    QualType T, std::string& S,
4428                                                    bool Extended) const {
4429   // Encode type qualifer, 'in', 'inout', etc. for the parameter.
4430   getObjCEncodingForTypeQualifier(QT, S);
4431   // Encode parameter type.
4432   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(T, S, true, true, 0,
4433                              true     /*OutermostType*/,
4434                              false    /*EncodingProperty*/,
4435                              false    /*StructField*/,
4436                              Extended /*EncodeBlockParameters*/,
4437                              Extended /*EncodeClassNames*/);
4438 }
4439 
4440 /// getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl - Return the encoded type for this method
4441 /// declaration.
4442 bool ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl(const ObjCMethodDecl *Decl,
4443                                               std::string& S,
4444                                               bool Extended) const {
4445   // FIXME: This is not very efficient.
4446   // Encode return type.
4447   getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl->getObjCDeclQualifier(),
4448                                     Decl->getResultType(), S, Extended);
4449   // Compute size of all parameters.
4450   // Start with computing size of a pointer in number of bytes.
4451   // FIXME: There might(should) be a better way of doing this computation!
4452   SourceLocation Loc;
4453   CharUnits PtrSize = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy);
4454   // The first two arguments (self and _cmd) are pointers; account for
4455   // their size.
4456   CharUnits ParmOffset = 2 * PtrSize;
4457   for (ObjCMethodDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4458        E = Decl->sel_param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4459     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType();
4460     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4461     if (sz.isZero())
4462       continue;
4463 
4464     assert (sz.isPositive() &&
4465         "getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl - Incomplete param type");
4466     ParmOffset += sz;
4467   }
4468   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4469   S += "@0:";
4470   S += charUnitsToString(PtrSize);
4471 
4472   // Argument types.
4473   ParmOffset = 2 * PtrSize;
4474   for (ObjCMethodDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4475        E = Decl->sel_param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4476     const ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI;
4477     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType();
4478     if (const ArrayType *AT =
4479           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4480       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of
4481       // elements.
4482       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT))
4483         PType = PVDecl->getType();
4484     } else if (PType->isFunctionType())
4485       PType = PVDecl->getType();
4486     getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(PVDecl->getObjCDeclQualifier(),
4487                                       PType, S, Extended);
4488     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4489     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4490   }
4491 
4492   return false;
4493 }
4494 
4495 /// getObjCEncodingForPropertyDecl - Return the encoded type for this
4496 /// property declaration. If non-NULL, Container must be either an
4497 /// ObjCCategoryImplDecl or ObjCImplementationDecl; it should only be
4498 /// NULL when getting encodings for protocol properties.
4499 /// Property attributes are stored as a comma-delimited C string. The simple
4500 /// attributes readonly and bycopy are encoded as single characters. The
4501 /// parametrized attributes, getter=name, setter=name, and ivar=name, are
4502 /// encoded as single characters, followed by an identifier. Property types
4503 /// are also encoded as a parametrized attribute. The characters used to encode
4504 /// these attributes are defined by the following enumeration:
4505 /// @code
4506 /// enum PropertyAttributes {
4507 /// kPropertyReadOnly = 'R',   // property is read-only.
4508 /// kPropertyBycopy = 'C',     // property is a copy of the value last assigned
4509 /// kPropertyByref = '&',  // property is a reference to the value last assigned
4510 /// kPropertyDynamic = 'D',    // property is dynamic
4511 /// kPropertyGetter = 'G',     // followed by getter selector name
4512 /// kPropertySetter = 'S',     // followed by setter selector name
4513 /// kPropertyInstanceVariable = 'V'  // followed by instance variable  name
4514 /// kPropertyType = 'T'              // followed by old-style type encoding.
4515 /// kPropertyWeak = 'W'              // 'weak' property
4516 /// kPropertyStrong = 'P'            // property GC'able
4517 /// kPropertyNonAtomic = 'N'         // property non-atomic
4518 /// };
4519 /// @endcode
4520 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForPropertyDecl(const ObjCPropertyDecl *PD,
4521                                                 const Decl *Container,
4522                                                 std::string& S) const {
4523   // Collect information from the property implementation decl(s).
4524   bool Dynamic = false;
4525   ObjCPropertyImplDecl *SynthesizePID = 0;
4526 
4527   // FIXME: Duplicated code due to poor abstraction.
4528   if (Container) {
4529     if (const ObjCCategoryImplDecl *CID =
4530         dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryImplDecl>(Container)) {
4531       for (ObjCCategoryImplDecl::propimpl_iterator
4532              i = CID->propimpl_begin(), e = CID->propimpl_end();
4533            i != e; ++i) {
4534         ObjCPropertyImplDecl *PID = *i;
4535         if (PID->getPropertyDecl() == PD) {
4536           if (PID->getPropertyImplementation()==ObjCPropertyImplDecl::Dynamic) {
4537             Dynamic = true;
4538           } else {
4539             SynthesizePID = PID;
4540           }
4541         }
4542       }
4543     } else {
4544       const ObjCImplementationDecl *OID=cast<ObjCImplementationDecl>(Container);
4545       for (ObjCCategoryImplDecl::propimpl_iterator
4546              i = OID->propimpl_begin(), e = OID->propimpl_end();
4547            i != e; ++i) {
4548         ObjCPropertyImplDecl *PID = *i;
4549         if (PID->getPropertyDecl() == PD) {
4550           if (PID->getPropertyImplementation()==ObjCPropertyImplDecl::Dynamic) {
4551             Dynamic = true;
4552           } else {
4553             SynthesizePID = PID;
4554           }
4555         }
4556       }
4557     }
4558   }
4559 
4560   // FIXME: This is not very efficient.
4561   S = "T";
4562 
4563   // Encode result type.
4564   // GCC has some special rules regarding encoding of properties which
4565   // closely resembles encoding of ivars.
4566   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PD->getType(), S, true, true, 0,
4567                              true /* outermost type */,
4568                              true /* encoding for property */);
4569 
4570   if (PD->isReadOnly()) {
4571     S += ",R";
4572   } else {
4573     switch (PD->getSetterKind()) {
4574     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Assign: break;
4575     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Copy:   S += ",C"; break;
4576     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Retain: S += ",&"; break;
4577     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Weak:   S += ",W"; break;
4578     }
4579   }
4580 
4581   // It really isn't clear at all what this means, since properties
4582   // are "dynamic by default".
4583   if (Dynamic)
4584     S += ",D";
4585 
4586   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_nonatomic)
4587     S += ",N";
4588 
4589   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_getter) {
4590     S += ",G";
4591     S += PD->getGetterName().getAsString();
4592   }
4593 
4594   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_setter) {
4595     S += ",S";
4596     S += PD->getSetterName().getAsString();
4597   }
4598 
4599   if (SynthesizePID) {
4600     const ObjCIvarDecl *OID = SynthesizePID->getPropertyIvarDecl();
4601     S += ",V";
4602     S += OID->getNameAsString();
4603   }
4604 
4605   // FIXME: OBJCGC: weak & strong
4606 }
4607 
4608 /// getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding -
4609 /// Another legacy compatibility encoding: 32-bit longs are encoded as
4610 /// 'l' or 'L' , but not always.  For typedefs, we need to use
4611 /// 'i' or 'I' instead if encoding a struct field, or a pointer!
4612 ///
4613 void ASTContext::getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding (QualType &PointeeTy) const {
4614   if (isa<TypedefType>(PointeeTy.getTypePtr())) {
4615     if (const BuiltinType *BT = PointeeTy->getAs<BuiltinType>()) {
4616       if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::ULong && getIntWidth(PointeeTy) == 32)
4617         PointeeTy = UnsignedIntTy;
4618       else
4619         if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Long && getIntWidth(PointeeTy) == 32)
4620           PointeeTy = IntTy;
4621     }
4622   }
4623 }
4624 
4625 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForType(QualType T, std::string& S,
4626                                         const FieldDecl *Field) const {
4627   // We follow the behavior of gcc, expanding structures which are
4628   // directly pointed to, and expanding embedded structures. Note that
4629   // these rules are sufficient to prevent recursive encoding of the
4630   // same type.
4631   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(T, S, true, true, Field,
4632                              true /* outermost type */);
4633 }
4634 
4635 static char ObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(const ASTContext *C, QualType T) {
4636     switch (T->getAs<BuiltinType>()->getKind()) {
4637     default: llvm_unreachable("Unhandled builtin type kind");
4638     case BuiltinType::Void:       return 'v';
4639     case BuiltinType::Bool:       return 'B';
4640     case BuiltinType::Char_U:
4641     case BuiltinType::UChar:      return 'C';
4642     case BuiltinType::UShort:     return 'S';
4643     case BuiltinType::UInt:       return 'I';
4644     case BuiltinType::ULong:
4645         return C->getIntWidth(T) == 32 ? 'L' : 'Q';
4646     case BuiltinType::UInt128:    return 'T';
4647     case BuiltinType::ULongLong:  return 'Q';
4648     case BuiltinType::Char_S:
4649     case BuiltinType::SChar:      return 'c';
4650     case BuiltinType::Short:      return 's';
4651     case BuiltinType::WChar_S:
4652     case BuiltinType::WChar_U:
4653     case BuiltinType::Int:        return 'i';
4654     case BuiltinType::Long:
4655       return C->getIntWidth(T) == 32 ? 'l' : 'q';
4656     case BuiltinType::LongLong:   return 'q';
4657     case BuiltinType::Int128:     return 't';
4658     case BuiltinType::Float:      return 'f';
4659     case BuiltinType::Double:     return 'd';
4660     case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return 'D';
4661     }
4662 }
4663 
4664 static char ObjCEncodingForEnumType(const ASTContext *C, const EnumType *ET) {
4665   EnumDecl *Enum = ET->getDecl();
4666 
4667   // The encoding of an non-fixed enum type is always 'i', regardless of size.
4668   if (!Enum->isFixed())
4669     return 'i';
4670 
4671   // The encoding of a fixed enum type matches its fixed underlying type.
4672   return ObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(C, Enum->getIntegerType());
4673 }
4674 
4675 static void EncodeBitField(const ASTContext *Ctx, std::string& S,
4676                            QualType T, const FieldDecl *FD) {
4677   assert(FD->isBitField() && "not a bitfield - getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl");
4678   S += 'b';
4679   // The NeXT runtime encodes bit fields as b followed by the number of bits.
4680   // The GNU runtime requires more information; bitfields are encoded as b,
4681   // then the offset (in bits) of the first element, then the type of the
4682   // bitfield, then the size in bits.  For example, in this structure:
4683   //
4684   // struct
4685   // {
4686   //    int integer;
4687   //    int flags:2;
4688   // };
4689   // On a 32-bit system, the encoding for flags would be b2 for the NeXT
4690   // runtime, but b32i2 for the GNU runtime.  The reason for this extra
4691   // information is not especially sensible, but we're stuck with it for
4692   // compatibility with GCC, although providing it breaks anything that
4693   // actually uses runtime introspection and wants to work on both runtimes...
4694   if (Ctx->getLangOpts().ObjCRuntime.isGNUFamily()) {
4695     const RecordDecl *RD = FD->getParent();
4696     const ASTRecordLayout &RL = Ctx->getASTRecordLayout(RD);
4697     S += llvm::utostr(RL.getFieldOffset(FD->getFieldIndex()));
4698     if (const EnumType *ET = T->getAs<EnumType>())
4699       S += ObjCEncodingForEnumType(Ctx, ET);
4700     else
4701       S += ObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(Ctx, T);
4702   }
4703   S += llvm::utostr(FD->getBitWidthValue(*Ctx));
4704 }
4705 
4706 // FIXME: Use SmallString for accumulating string.
4707 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(QualType T, std::string& S,
4708                                             bool ExpandPointedToStructures,
4709                                             bool ExpandStructures,
4710                                             const FieldDecl *FD,
4711                                             bool OutermostType,
4712                                             bool EncodingProperty,
4713                                             bool StructField,
4714                                             bool EncodeBlockParameters,
4715                                             bool EncodeClassNames) const {
4716   if (T->getAs<BuiltinType>()) {
4717     if (FD && FD->isBitField())
4718       return EncodeBitField(this, S, T, FD);
4719     S += ObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(this, T);
4720     return;
4721   }
4722 
4723   if (const ComplexType *CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>()) {
4724     S += 'j';
4725     getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(CT->getElementType(), S, false, false, 0, false,
4726                                false);
4727     return;
4728   }
4729 
4730   // encoding for pointer or r3eference types.
4731   QualType PointeeTy;
4732   if (const PointerType *PT = T->getAs<PointerType>()) {
4733     if (PT->isObjCSelType()) {
4734       S += ':';
4735       return;
4736     }
4737     PointeeTy = PT->getPointeeType();
4738   }
4739   else if (const ReferenceType *RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>())
4740     PointeeTy = RT->getPointeeType();
4741   if (!PointeeTy.isNull()) {
4742     bool isReadOnly = false;
4743     // For historical/compatibility reasons, the read-only qualifier of the
4744     // pointee gets emitted _before_ the '^'.  The read-only qualifier of
4745     // the pointer itself gets ignored, _unless_ we are looking at a typedef!
4746     // Also, do not emit the 'r' for anything but the outermost type!
4747     if (isa<TypedefType>(T.getTypePtr())) {
4748       if (OutermostType && T.isConstQualified()) {
4749         isReadOnly = true;
4750         S += 'r';
4751       }
4752     } else if (OutermostType) {
4753       QualType P = PointeeTy;
4754       while (P->getAs<PointerType>())
4755         P = P->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType();
4756       if (P.isConstQualified()) {
4757         isReadOnly = true;
4758         S += 'r';
4759       }
4760     }
4761     if (isReadOnly) {
4762       // Another legacy compatibility encoding. Some ObjC qualifier and type
4763       // combinations need to be rearranged.
4764       // Rewrite "in const" from "nr" to "rn"
4765       if (StringRef(S).endswith("nr"))
4766         S.replace(S.end()-2, S.end(), "rn");
4767     }
4768 
4769     if (PointeeTy->isCharType()) {
4770       // char pointer types should be encoded as '*' unless it is a
4771       // type that has been typedef'd to 'BOOL'.
4772       if (!isTypeTypedefedAsBOOL(PointeeTy)) {
4773         S += '*';
4774         return;
4775       }
4776     } else if (const RecordType *RTy = PointeeTy->getAs<RecordType>()) {
4777       // GCC binary compat: Need to convert "struct objc_class *" to "#".
4778       if (RTy->getDecl()->getIdentifier() == &Idents.get("objc_class")) {
4779         S += '#';
4780         return;
4781       }
4782       // GCC binary compat: Need to convert "struct objc_object *" to "@".
4783       if (RTy->getDecl()->getIdentifier() == &Idents.get("objc_object")) {
4784         S += '@';
4785         return;
4786       }
4787       // fall through...
4788     }
4789     S += '^';
4790     getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(PointeeTy);
4791 
4792     getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PointeeTy, S, false, ExpandPointedToStructures,
4793                                NULL);
4794     return;
4795   }
4796 
4797   if (const ArrayType *AT =
4798       // Ignore type qualifiers etc.
4799         dyn_cast<ArrayType>(T->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4800     if (isa<IncompleteArrayType>(AT) && !StructField) {
4801       // Incomplete arrays are encoded as a pointer to the array element.
4802       S += '^';
4803 
4804       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getElementType(), S,
4805                                  false, ExpandStructures, FD);
4806     } else {
4807       S += '[';
4808 
4809       if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) {
4810         if (getTypeSize(CAT->getElementType()) == 0)
4811           S += '0';
4812         else
4813           S += llvm::utostr(CAT->getSize().getZExtValue());
4814       } else {
4815         //Variable length arrays are encoded as a regular array with 0 elements.
4816         assert((isa<VariableArrayType>(AT) || isa<IncompleteArrayType>(AT)) &&
4817                "Unknown array type!");
4818         S += '0';
4819       }
4820 
4821       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getElementType(), S,
4822                                  false, ExpandStructures, FD);
4823       S += ']';
4824     }
4825     return;
4826   }
4827 
4828   if (T->getAs<FunctionType>()) {
4829     S += '?';
4830     return;
4831   }
4832 
4833   if (const RecordType *RTy = T->getAs<RecordType>()) {
4834     RecordDecl *RDecl = RTy->getDecl();
4835     S += RDecl->isUnion() ? '(' : '{';
4836     // Anonymous structures print as '?'
4837     if (const IdentifierInfo *II = RDecl->getIdentifier()) {
4838       S += II->getName();
4839       if (ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl *Spec
4840           = dyn_cast<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(RDecl)) {
4841         const TemplateArgumentList &TemplateArgs = Spec->getTemplateArgs();
4842         std::string TemplateArgsStr
4843           = TemplateSpecializationType::PrintTemplateArgumentList(
4844                                             TemplateArgs.data(),
4845                                             TemplateArgs.size(),
4846                                             (*this).getPrintingPolicy());
4847 
4848         S += TemplateArgsStr;
4849       }
4850     } else {
4851       S += '?';
4852     }
4853     if (ExpandStructures) {
4854       S += '=';
4855       if (!RDecl->isUnion()) {
4856         getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(RDecl, S, FD);
4857       } else {
4858         for (RecordDecl::field_iterator Field = RDecl->field_begin(),
4859                                      FieldEnd = RDecl->field_end();
4860              Field != FieldEnd; ++Field) {
4861           if (FD) {
4862             S += '"';
4863             S += Field->getNameAsString();
4864             S += '"';
4865           }
4866 
4867           // Special case bit-fields.
4868           if (Field->isBitField()) {
4869             getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true,
4870                                        *Field);
4871           } else {
4872             QualType qt = Field->getType();
4873             getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(qt);
4874             getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(qt, S, false, true,
4875                                        FD, /*OutermostType*/false,
4876                                        /*EncodingProperty*/false,
4877                                        /*StructField*/true);
4878           }
4879         }
4880       }
4881     }
4882     S += RDecl->isUnion() ? ')' : '}';
4883     return;
4884   }
4885 
4886   if (const EnumType *ET = T->getAs<EnumType>()) {
4887     if (FD && FD->isBitField())
4888       EncodeBitField(this, S, T, FD);
4889     else
4890       S += ObjCEncodingForEnumType(this, ET);
4891     return;
4892   }
4893 
4894   if (const BlockPointerType *BT = T->getAs<BlockPointerType>()) {
4895     S += "@?"; // Unlike a pointer-to-function, which is "^?".
4896     if (EncodeBlockParameters) {
4897       const FunctionType *FT = BT->getPointeeType()->getAs<FunctionType>();
4898 
4899       S += '<';
4900       // Block return type
4901       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(FT->getResultType(), S,
4902                                  ExpandPointedToStructures, ExpandStructures,
4903                                  FD,
4904                                  false /* OutermostType */,
4905                                  EncodingProperty,
4906                                  false /* StructField */,
4907                                  EncodeBlockParameters,
4908                                  EncodeClassNames);
4909       // Block self
4910       S += "@?";
4911       // Block parameters
4912       if (const FunctionProtoType *FPT = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(FT)) {
4913         for (FunctionProtoType::arg_type_iterator I = FPT->arg_type_begin(),
4914                E = FPT->arg_type_end(); I && (I != E); ++I) {
4915           getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(*I, S,
4916                                      ExpandPointedToStructures,
4917                                      ExpandStructures,
4918                                      FD,
4919                                      false /* OutermostType */,
4920                                      EncodingProperty,
4921                                      false /* StructField */,
4922                                      EncodeBlockParameters,
4923                                      EncodeClassNames);
4924         }
4925       }
4926       S += '>';
4927     }
4928     return;
4929   }
4930 
4931   // Ignore protocol qualifiers when mangling at this level.
4932   if (const ObjCObjectType *OT = T->getAs<ObjCObjectType>())
4933     T = OT->getBaseType();
4934 
4935   if (const ObjCInterfaceType *OIT = T->getAs<ObjCInterfaceType>()) {
4936     // @encode(class_name)
4937     ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI = OIT->getDecl();
4938     S += '{';
4939     const IdentifierInfo *II = OI->getIdentifier();
4940     S += II->getName();
4941     S += '=';
4942     SmallVector<const ObjCIvarDecl*, 32> Ivars;
4943     DeepCollectObjCIvars(OI, true, Ivars);
4944     for (unsigned i = 0, e = Ivars.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4945       const FieldDecl *Field = cast<FieldDecl>(Ivars[i]);
4946       if (Field->isBitField())
4947         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true, Field);
4948       else
4949         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true, FD);
4950     }
4951     S += '}';
4952     return;
4953   }
4954 
4955   if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *OPT = T->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()) {
4956     if (OPT->isObjCIdType()) {
4957       S += '@';
4958       return;
4959     }
4960 
4961     if (OPT->isObjCClassType() || OPT->isObjCQualifiedClassType()) {
4962       // FIXME: Consider if we need to output qualifiers for 'Class<p>'.
4963       // Since this is a binary compatibility issue, need to consult with runtime
4964       // folks. Fortunately, this is a *very* obsure construct.
4965       S += '#';
4966       return;
4967     }
4968 
4969     if (OPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType()) {
4970       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(getObjCIdType(), S,
4971                                  ExpandPointedToStructures,
4972                                  ExpandStructures, FD);
4973       if (FD || EncodingProperty || EncodeClassNames) {
4974         // Note that we do extended encoding of protocol qualifer list
4975         // Only when doing ivar or property encoding.
4976         S += '"';
4977         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = OPT->qual_begin(),
4978              E = OPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
4979           S += '<';
4980           S += (*I)->getNameAsString();
4981           S += '>';
4982         }
4983         S += '"';
4984       }
4985       return;
4986     }
4987 
4988     QualType PointeeTy = OPT->getPointeeType();
4989     if (!EncodingProperty &&
4990         isa<TypedefType>(PointeeTy.getTypePtr())) {
4991       // Another historical/compatibility reason.
4992       // We encode the underlying type which comes out as
4993       // {...};
4994       S += '^';
4995       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PointeeTy, S,
4996                                  false, ExpandPointedToStructures,
4997                                  NULL);
4998       return;
4999     }
5000 
5001     S += '@';
5002     if (OPT->getInterfaceDecl() &&
5003         (FD || EncodingProperty || EncodeClassNames)) {
5004       S += '"';
5005       S += OPT->getInterfaceDecl()->getIdentifier()->getName();
5006       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = OPT->qual_begin(),
5007            E = OPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5008         S += '<';
5009         S += (*I)->getNameAsString();
5010         S += '>';
5011       }
5012       S += '"';
5013     }
5014     return;
5015   }
5016 
5017   // gcc just blithely ignores member pointers.
5018   // TODO: maybe there should be a mangling for these
5019   if (T->getAs<MemberPointerType>())
5020     return;
5021 
5022   if (T->isVectorType()) {
5023     // This matches gcc's encoding, even though technically it is
5024     // insufficient.
5025     // FIXME. We should do a better job than gcc.
5026     return;
5027   }
5028 
5029   llvm_unreachable("@encode for type not implemented!");
5030 }
5031 
5032 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(RecordDecl *RDecl,
5033                                                  std::string &S,
5034                                                  const FieldDecl *FD,
5035                                                  bool includeVBases) const {
5036   assert(RDecl && "Expected non-null RecordDecl");
5037   assert(!RDecl->isUnion() && "Should not be called for unions");
5038   if (!RDecl->getDefinition())
5039     return;
5040 
5041   CXXRecordDecl *CXXRec = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(RDecl);
5042   std::multimap<uint64_t, NamedDecl *> FieldOrBaseOffsets;
5043   const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(RDecl);
5044 
5045   if (CXXRec) {
5046     for (CXXRecordDecl::base_class_iterator
5047            BI = CXXRec->bases_begin(),
5048            BE = CXXRec->bases_end(); BI != BE; ++BI) {
5049       if (!BI->isVirtual()) {
5050         CXXRecordDecl *base = BI->getType()->getAsCXXRecordDecl();
5051         if (base->isEmpty())
5052           continue;
5053         uint64_t offs = toBits(layout.getBaseClassOffset(base));
5054         FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs),
5055                                   std::make_pair(offs, base));
5056       }
5057     }
5058   }
5059 
5060   unsigned i = 0;
5061   for (RecordDecl::field_iterator Field = RDecl->field_begin(),
5062                                FieldEnd = RDecl->field_end();
5063        Field != FieldEnd; ++Field, ++i) {
5064     uint64_t offs = layout.getFieldOffset(i);
5065     FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs),
5066                               std::make_pair(offs, *Field));
5067   }
5068 
5069   if (CXXRec && includeVBases) {
5070     for (CXXRecordDecl::base_class_iterator
5071            BI = CXXRec->vbases_begin(),
5072            BE = CXXRec->vbases_end(); BI != BE; ++BI) {
5073       CXXRecordDecl *base = BI->getType()->getAsCXXRecordDecl();
5074       if (base->isEmpty())
5075         continue;
5076       uint64_t offs = toBits(layout.getVBaseClassOffset(base));
5077       if (FieldOrBaseOffsets.find(offs) == FieldOrBaseOffsets.end())
5078         FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.end(),
5079                                   std::make_pair(offs, base));
5080     }
5081   }
5082 
5083   CharUnits size;
5084   if (CXXRec) {
5085     size = includeVBases ? layout.getSize() : layout.getNonVirtualSize();
5086   } else {
5087     size = layout.getSize();
5088   }
5089 
5090   uint64_t CurOffs = 0;
5091   std::multimap<uint64_t, NamedDecl *>::iterator
5092     CurLayObj = FieldOrBaseOffsets.begin();
5093 
5094   if (CXXRec && CXXRec->isDynamicClass() &&
5095       (CurLayObj == FieldOrBaseOffsets.end() || CurLayObj->first != 0)) {
5096     if (FD) {
5097       S += "\"_vptr$";
5098       std::string recname = CXXRec->getNameAsString();
5099       if (recname.empty()) recname = "?";
5100       S += recname;
5101       S += '"';
5102     }
5103     S += "^^?";
5104     CurOffs += getTypeSize(VoidPtrTy);
5105   }
5106 
5107   if (!RDecl->hasFlexibleArrayMember()) {
5108     // Mark the end of the structure.
5109     uint64_t offs = toBits(size);
5110     FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs),
5111                               std::make_pair(offs, (NamedDecl*)0));
5112   }
5113 
5114   for (; CurLayObj != FieldOrBaseOffsets.end(); ++CurLayObj) {
5115     assert(CurOffs <= CurLayObj->first);
5116 
5117     if (CurOffs < CurLayObj->first) {
5118       uint64_t padding = CurLayObj->first - CurOffs;
5119       // FIXME: There doesn't seem to be a way to indicate in the encoding that
5120       // packing/alignment of members is different that normal, in which case
5121       // the encoding will be out-of-sync with the real layout.
5122       // If the runtime switches to just consider the size of types without
5123       // taking into account alignment, we could make padding explicit in the
5124       // encoding (e.g. using arrays of chars). The encoding strings would be
5125       // longer then though.
5126       CurOffs += padding;
5127     }
5128 
5129     NamedDecl *dcl = CurLayObj->second;
5130     if (dcl == 0)
5131       break; // reached end of structure.
5132 
5133     if (CXXRecordDecl *base = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(dcl)) {
5134       // We expand the bases without their virtual bases since those are going
5135       // in the initial structure. Note that this differs from gcc which
5136       // expands virtual bases each time one is encountered in the hierarchy,
5137       // making the encoding type bigger than it really is.
5138       getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(base, S, FD, /*includeVBases*/false);
5139       assert(!base->isEmpty());
5140       CurOffs += toBits(getASTRecordLayout(base).getNonVirtualSize());
5141     } else {
5142       FieldDecl *field = cast<FieldDecl>(dcl);
5143       if (FD) {
5144         S += '"';
5145         S += field->getNameAsString();
5146         S += '"';
5147       }
5148 
5149       if (field->isBitField()) {
5150         EncodeBitField(this, S, field->getType(), field);
5151         CurOffs += field->getBitWidthValue(*this);
5152       } else {
5153         QualType qt = field->getType();
5154         getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(qt);
5155         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(qt, S, false, true, FD,
5156                                    /*OutermostType*/false,
5157                                    /*EncodingProperty*/false,
5158                                    /*StructField*/true);
5159         CurOffs += getTypeSize(field->getType());
5160       }
5161     }
5162   }
5163 }
5164 
5165 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForTypeQualifier(Decl::ObjCDeclQualifier QT,
5166                                                  std::string& S) const {
5167   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_In)
5168     S += 'n';
5169   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Inout)
5170     S += 'N';
5171   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Out)
5172     S += 'o';
5173   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Bycopy)
5174     S += 'O';
5175   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Byref)
5176     S += 'R';
5177   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Oneway)
5178     S += 'V';
5179 }
5180 
5181 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCIdDecl() const {
5182   if (!ObjCIdDecl) {
5183     QualType T = getObjCObjectType(ObjCBuiltinIdTy, 0, 0);
5184     T = getObjCObjectPointerType(T);
5185     TypeSourceInfo *IdInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T);
5186     ObjCIdDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
5187                                      getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5188                                      SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5189                                      &Idents.get("id"), IdInfo);
5190   }
5191 
5192   return ObjCIdDecl;
5193 }
5194 
5195 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCSelDecl() const {
5196   if (!ObjCSelDecl) {
5197     QualType SelT = getPointerType(ObjCBuiltinSelTy);
5198     TypeSourceInfo *SelInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(SelT);
5199     ObjCSelDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
5200                                       getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5201                                       SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5202                                       &Idents.get("SEL"), SelInfo);
5203   }
5204   return ObjCSelDecl;
5205 }
5206 
5207 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCClassDecl() const {
5208   if (!ObjCClassDecl) {
5209     QualType T = getObjCObjectType(ObjCBuiltinClassTy, 0, 0);
5210     T = getObjCObjectPointerType(T);
5211     TypeSourceInfo *ClassInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T);
5212     ObjCClassDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
5213                                         getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5214                                         SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5215                                         &Idents.get("Class"), ClassInfo);
5216   }
5217 
5218   return ObjCClassDecl;
5219 }
5220 
5221 ObjCInterfaceDecl *ASTContext::getObjCProtocolDecl() const {
5222   if (!ObjCProtocolClassDecl) {
5223     ObjCProtocolClassDecl
5224       = ObjCInterfaceDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5225                                   SourceLocation(),
5226                                   &Idents.get("Protocol"),
5227                                   /*PrevDecl=*/0,
5228                                   SourceLocation(), true);
5229   }
5230 
5231   return ObjCProtocolClassDecl;
5232 }
5233 
5234 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5235 // __builtin_va_list Construction Functions
5236 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5237 
5238 static TypedefDecl *CreateCharPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5239   // typedef char* __builtin_va_list;
5240   QualType CharPtrType = Context->getPointerType(Context->CharTy);
5241   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5242     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(CharPtrType);
5243 
5244   TypedefDecl *VaListTypeDecl
5245     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5246                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5247                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5248                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5249                           TInfo);
5250   return VaListTypeDecl;
5251 }
5252 
5253 static TypedefDecl *CreateVoidPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5254   // typedef void* __builtin_va_list;
5255   QualType VoidPtrType = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5256   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5257     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VoidPtrType);
5258 
5259   TypedefDecl *VaListTypeDecl
5260     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5261                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5262                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5263                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5264                           TInfo);
5265   return VaListTypeDecl;
5266 }
5267 
5268 static TypedefDecl *CreatePowerABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5269   // typedef struct __va_list_tag {
5270   RecordDecl *VaListTagDecl;
5271 
5272   VaListTagDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct,
5273                                    Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5274                                    &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"));
5275   VaListTagDecl->startDefinition();
5276 
5277   const size_t NumFields = 5;
5278   QualType FieldTypes[NumFields];
5279   const char *FieldNames[NumFields];
5280 
5281   //   unsigned char gpr;
5282   FieldTypes[0] = Context->UnsignedCharTy;
5283   FieldNames[0] = "gpr";
5284 
5285   //   unsigned char fpr;
5286   FieldTypes[1] = Context->UnsignedCharTy;
5287   FieldNames[1] = "fpr";
5288 
5289   //   unsigned short reserved;
5290   FieldTypes[2] = Context->UnsignedShortTy;
5291   FieldNames[2] = "reserved";
5292 
5293   //   void* overflow_arg_area;
5294   FieldTypes[3] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5295   FieldNames[3] = "overflow_arg_area";
5296 
5297   //   void* reg_save_area;
5298   FieldTypes[4] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5299   FieldNames[4] = "reg_save_area";
5300 
5301   // Create fields
5302   for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumFields; ++i) {
5303     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*Context, VaListTagDecl,
5304                                          SourceLocation(),
5305                                          SourceLocation(),
5306                                          &Context->Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
5307                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
5308                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
5309                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
5310                                          ICIS_NoInit);
5311     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
5312     VaListTagDecl->addDecl(Field);
5313   }
5314   VaListTagDecl->completeDefinition();
5315   QualType VaListTagType = Context->getRecordType(VaListTagDecl);
5316   Context->VaListTagTy = VaListTagType;
5317 
5318   // } __va_list_tag;
5319   TypedefDecl *VaListTagTypedefDecl
5320     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5321                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5322                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5323                           &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"),
5324                           Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagType));
5325   QualType VaListTagTypedefType =
5326     Context->getTypedefType(VaListTagTypedefDecl);
5327 
5328   // typedef __va_list_tag __builtin_va_list[1];
5329   llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 1);
5330   QualType VaListTagArrayType
5331     = Context->getConstantArrayType(VaListTagTypedefType,
5332                                     Size, ArrayType::Normal, 0);
5333   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5334     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagArrayType);
5335   TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl
5336     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5337                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5338                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5339                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5340                           TInfo);
5341 
5342   return VaListTypedefDecl;
5343 }
5344 
5345 static TypedefDecl *
5346 CreateX86_64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5347   // typedef struct __va_list_tag {
5348   RecordDecl *VaListTagDecl;
5349   VaListTagDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct,
5350                                    Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5351                                    &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"));
5352   VaListTagDecl->startDefinition();
5353 
5354   const size_t NumFields = 4;
5355   QualType FieldTypes[NumFields];
5356   const char *FieldNames[NumFields];
5357 
5358   //   unsigned gp_offset;
5359   FieldTypes[0] = Context->UnsignedIntTy;
5360   FieldNames[0] = "gp_offset";
5361 
5362   //   unsigned fp_offset;
5363   FieldTypes[1] = Context->UnsignedIntTy;
5364   FieldNames[1] = "fp_offset";
5365 
5366   //   void* overflow_arg_area;
5367   FieldTypes[2] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5368   FieldNames[2] = "overflow_arg_area";
5369 
5370   //   void* reg_save_area;
5371   FieldTypes[3] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5372   FieldNames[3] = "reg_save_area";
5373 
5374   // Create fields
5375   for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumFields; ++i) {
5376     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5377                                          VaListTagDecl,
5378                                          SourceLocation(),
5379                                          SourceLocation(),
5380                                          &Context->Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
5381                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
5382                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
5383                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
5384                                          ICIS_NoInit);
5385     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
5386     VaListTagDecl->addDecl(Field);
5387   }
5388   VaListTagDecl->completeDefinition();
5389   QualType VaListTagType = Context->getRecordType(VaListTagDecl);
5390   Context->VaListTagTy = VaListTagType;
5391 
5392   // } __va_list_tag;
5393   TypedefDecl *VaListTagTypedefDecl
5394     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5395                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5396                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5397                           &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"),
5398                           Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagType));
5399   QualType VaListTagTypedefType =
5400     Context->getTypedefType(VaListTagTypedefDecl);
5401 
5402   // typedef __va_list_tag __builtin_va_list[1];
5403   llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 1);
5404   QualType VaListTagArrayType
5405     = Context->getConstantArrayType(VaListTagTypedefType,
5406                                       Size, ArrayType::Normal,0);
5407   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5408     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagArrayType);
5409   TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl
5410     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5411                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5412                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5413                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5414                           TInfo);
5415 
5416   return VaListTypedefDecl;
5417 }
5418 
5419 static TypedefDecl *CreatePNaClABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5420   // typedef int __builtin_va_list[4];
5421   llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 4);
5422   QualType IntArrayType
5423     = Context->getConstantArrayType(Context->IntTy,
5424 				    Size, ArrayType::Normal, 0);
5425   TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl
5426     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5427                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5428                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5429                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5430                           Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(IntArrayType));
5431 
5432   return VaListTypedefDecl;
5433 }
5434 
5435 static TypedefDecl *CreateVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context,
5436                                      TargetInfo::BuiltinVaListKind Kind) {
5437   switch (Kind) {
5438   case TargetInfo::CharPtrBuiltinVaList:
5439     return CreateCharPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5440   case TargetInfo::VoidPtrBuiltinVaList:
5441     return CreateVoidPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5442   case TargetInfo::PowerABIBuiltinVaList:
5443     return CreatePowerABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5444   case TargetInfo::X86_64ABIBuiltinVaList:
5445     return CreateX86_64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5446   case TargetInfo::PNaClABIBuiltinVaList:
5447     return CreatePNaClABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5448   }
5449 
5450   llvm_unreachable("Unhandled __builtin_va_list type kind");
5451 }
5452 
5453 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getBuiltinVaListDecl() const {
5454   if (!BuiltinVaListDecl)
5455     BuiltinVaListDecl = CreateVaListDecl(this, Target->getBuiltinVaListKind());
5456 
5457   return BuiltinVaListDecl;
5458 }
5459 
5460 QualType ASTContext::getVaListTagType() const {
5461   // Force the creation of VaListTagTy by building the __builtin_va_list
5462   // declaration.
5463   if (VaListTagTy.isNull())
5464     (void) getBuiltinVaListDecl();
5465 
5466   return VaListTagTy;
5467 }
5468 
5469 void ASTContext::setObjCConstantStringInterface(ObjCInterfaceDecl *Decl) {
5470   assert(ObjCConstantStringType.isNull() &&
5471          "'NSConstantString' type already set!");
5472 
5473   ObjCConstantStringType = getObjCInterfaceType(Decl);
5474 }
5475 
5476 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that corresponds to a non-empty
5477 /// lookup.
5478 TemplateName
5479 ASTContext::getOverloadedTemplateName(UnresolvedSetIterator Begin,
5480                                       UnresolvedSetIterator End) const {
5481   unsigned size = End - Begin;
5482   assert(size > 1 && "set is not overloaded!");
5483 
5484   void *memory = Allocate(sizeof(OverloadedTemplateStorage) +
5485                           size * sizeof(FunctionTemplateDecl*));
5486   OverloadedTemplateStorage *OT = new(memory) OverloadedTemplateStorage(size);
5487 
5488   NamedDecl **Storage = OT->getStorage();
5489   for (UnresolvedSetIterator I = Begin; I != End; ++I) {
5490     NamedDecl *D = *I;
5491     assert(isa<FunctionTemplateDecl>(D) ||
5492            (isa<UsingShadowDecl>(D) &&
5493             isa<FunctionTemplateDecl>(D->getUnderlyingDecl())));
5494     *Storage++ = D;
5495   }
5496 
5497   return TemplateName(OT);
5498 }
5499 
5500 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a qualified
5501 /// template name such as \c std::vector.
5502 TemplateName
5503 ASTContext::getQualifiedTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
5504                                      bool TemplateKeyword,
5505                                      TemplateDecl *Template) const {
5506   assert(NNS && "Missing nested-name-specifier in qualified template name");
5507 
5508   // FIXME: Canonicalization?
5509   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5510   QualifiedTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, TemplateKeyword, Template);
5511 
5512   void *InsertPos = 0;
5513   QualifiedTemplateName *QTN =
5514     QualifiedTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5515   if (!QTN) {
5516     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<QualifiedTemplateName>())
5517         QualifiedTemplateName(NNS, TemplateKeyword, Template);
5518     QualifiedTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos);
5519   }
5520 
5521   return TemplateName(QTN);
5522 }
5523 
5524 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a dependent
5525 /// template name such as \c MetaFun::template apply.
5526 TemplateName
5527 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
5528                                      const IdentifierInfo *Name) const {
5529   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) &&
5530          "Nested name specifier must be dependent");
5531 
5532   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5533   DependentTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, Name);
5534 
5535   void *InsertPos = 0;
5536   DependentTemplateName *QTN =
5537     DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5538 
5539   if (QTN)
5540     return TemplateName(QTN);
5541 
5542   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
5543   if (CanonNNS == NNS) {
5544     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>())
5545         DependentTemplateName(NNS, Name);
5546   } else {
5547     TemplateName Canon = getDependentTemplateName(CanonNNS, Name);
5548     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>())
5549         DependentTemplateName(NNS, Name, Canon);
5550     DependentTemplateName *CheckQTN =
5551       DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5552     assert(!CheckQTN && "Dependent type name canonicalization broken");
5553     (void)CheckQTN;
5554   }
5555 
5556   DependentTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos);
5557   return TemplateName(QTN);
5558 }
5559 
5560 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a dependent
5561 /// template name such as \c MetaFun::template operator+.
5562 TemplateName
5563 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
5564                                      OverloadedOperatorKind Operator) const {
5565   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) &&
5566          "Nested name specifier must be dependent");
5567 
5568   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5569   DependentTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, Operator);
5570 
5571   void *InsertPos = 0;
5572   DependentTemplateName *QTN
5573     = DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5574 
5575   if (QTN)
5576     return TemplateName(QTN);
5577 
5578   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
5579   if (CanonNNS == NNS) {
5580     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>())
5581         DependentTemplateName(NNS, Operator);
5582   } else {
5583     TemplateName Canon = getDependentTemplateName(CanonNNS, Operator);
5584     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>())
5585         DependentTemplateName(NNS, Operator, Canon);
5586 
5587     DependentTemplateName *CheckQTN
5588       = DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5589     assert(!CheckQTN && "Dependent template name canonicalization broken");
5590     (void)CheckQTN;
5591   }
5592 
5593   DependentTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos);
5594   return TemplateName(QTN);
5595 }
5596 
5597 TemplateName
5598 ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTemplateParm(TemplateTemplateParmDecl *param,
5599                                          TemplateName replacement) const {
5600   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5601   SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage::Profile(ID, param, replacement);
5602 
5603   void *insertPos = 0;
5604   SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst
5605     = SubstTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
5606 
5607   if (!subst) {
5608     subst = new (*this) SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage(param, replacement);
5609     SubstTemplateTemplateParms.InsertNode(subst, insertPos);
5610   }
5611 
5612   return TemplateName(subst);
5613 }
5614 
5615 TemplateName
5616 ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(TemplateTemplateParmDecl *Param,
5617                                        const TemplateArgument &ArgPack) const {
5618   ASTContext &Self = const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this);
5619   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5620   SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage::Profile(ID, Self, Param, ArgPack);
5621 
5622   void *InsertPos = 0;
5623   SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *Subst
5624     = SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5625 
5626   if (!Subst) {
5627     Subst = new (*this) SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage(Param,
5628                                                            ArgPack.pack_size(),
5629                                                          ArgPack.pack_begin());
5630     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks.InsertNode(Subst, InsertPos);
5631   }
5632 
5633   return TemplateName(Subst);
5634 }
5635 
5636 /// getFromTargetType - Given one of the integer types provided by
5637 /// TargetInfo, produce the corresponding type. The unsigned @p Type
5638 /// is actually a value of type @c TargetInfo::IntType.
5639 CanQualType ASTContext::getFromTargetType(unsigned Type) const {
5640   switch (Type) {
5641   case TargetInfo::NoInt: return CanQualType();
5642   case TargetInfo::SignedShort: return ShortTy;
5643   case TargetInfo::UnsignedShort: return UnsignedShortTy;
5644   case TargetInfo::SignedInt: return IntTy;
5645   case TargetInfo::UnsignedInt: return UnsignedIntTy;
5646   case TargetInfo::SignedLong: return LongTy;
5647   case TargetInfo::UnsignedLong: return UnsignedLongTy;
5648   case TargetInfo::SignedLongLong: return LongLongTy;
5649   case TargetInfo::UnsignedLongLong: return UnsignedLongLongTy;
5650   }
5651 
5652   llvm_unreachable("Unhandled TargetInfo::IntType value");
5653 }
5654 
5655 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5656 //                        Type Predicates.
5657 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5658 
5659 /// getObjCGCAttr - Returns one of GCNone, Weak or Strong objc's
5660 /// garbage collection attribute.
5661 ///
5662 Qualifiers::GC ASTContext::getObjCGCAttrKind(QualType Ty) const {
5663   if (getLangOpts().getGC() == LangOptions::NonGC)
5664     return Qualifiers::GCNone;
5665 
5666   assert(getLangOpts().ObjC1);
5667   Qualifiers::GC GCAttrs = Ty.getObjCGCAttr();
5668 
5669   // Default behaviour under objective-C's gc is for ObjC pointers
5670   // (or pointers to them) be treated as though they were declared
5671   // as __strong.
5672   if (GCAttrs == Qualifiers::GCNone) {
5673     if (Ty->isObjCObjectPointerType() || Ty->isBlockPointerType())
5674       return Qualifiers::Strong;
5675     else if (Ty->isPointerType())
5676       return getObjCGCAttrKind(Ty->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType());
5677   } else {
5678     // It's not valid to set GC attributes on anything that isn't a
5679     // pointer.
5680 #ifndef NDEBUG
5681     QualType CT = Ty->getCanonicalTypeInternal();
5682     while (const ArrayType *AT = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(CT))
5683       CT = AT->getElementType();
5684     assert(CT->isAnyPointerType() || CT->isBlockPointerType());
5685 #endif
5686   }
5687   return GCAttrs;
5688 }
5689 
5690 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5691 //                        Type Compatibility Testing
5692 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5693 
5694 /// areCompatVectorTypes - Return true if the two specified vector types are
5695 /// compatible.
5696 static bool areCompatVectorTypes(const VectorType *LHS,
5697                                  const VectorType *RHS) {
5698   assert(LHS->isCanonicalUnqualified() && RHS->isCanonicalUnqualified());
5699   return LHS->getElementType() == RHS->getElementType() &&
5700          LHS->getNumElements() == RHS->getNumElements();
5701 }
5702 
5703 bool ASTContext::areCompatibleVectorTypes(QualType FirstVec,
5704                                           QualType SecondVec) {
5705   assert(FirstVec->isVectorType() && "FirstVec should be a vector type");
5706   assert(SecondVec->isVectorType() && "SecondVec should be a vector type");
5707 
5708   if (hasSameUnqualifiedType(FirstVec, SecondVec))
5709     return true;
5710 
5711   // Treat Neon vector types and most AltiVec vector types as if they are the
5712   // equivalent GCC vector types.
5713   const VectorType *First = FirstVec->getAs<VectorType>();
5714   const VectorType *Second = SecondVec->getAs<VectorType>();
5715   if (First->getNumElements() == Second->getNumElements() &&
5716       hasSameType(First->getElementType(), Second->getElementType()) &&
5717       First->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecPixel &&
5718       First->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecBool &&
5719       Second->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecPixel &&
5720       Second->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecBool)
5721     return true;
5722 
5723   return false;
5724 }
5725 
5726 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5727 // ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible - Compatibility testing for qualified id's.
5728 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5729 
5730 /// ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol - return 'true' if 'lProto' is in the
5731 /// inheritance hierarchy of 'rProto'.
5732 bool
5733 ASTContext::ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(ObjCProtocolDecl *lProto,
5734                                            ObjCProtocolDecl *rProto) const {
5735   if (declaresSameEntity(lProto, rProto))
5736     return true;
5737   for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator PI = rProto->protocol_begin(),
5738        E = rProto->protocol_end(); PI != E; ++PI)
5739     if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lProto, *PI))
5740       return true;
5741   return false;
5742 }
5743 
5744 /// QualifiedIdConformsQualifiedId - compare id<p,...> with id<p1,...>
5745 /// return true if lhs's protocols conform to rhs's protocol; false
5746 /// otherwise.
5747 bool ASTContext::QualifiedIdConformsQualifiedId(QualType lhs, QualType rhs) {
5748   if (lhs->isObjCQualifiedIdType() && rhs->isObjCQualifiedIdType())
5749     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(lhs, rhs, false);
5750   return false;
5751 }
5752 
5753 /// ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible - compare  Class<p,...> and
5754 /// Class<p1, ...>.
5755 bool ASTContext::ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible(QualType lhs,
5756                                                       QualType rhs) {
5757   const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsQID = lhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
5758   const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsOPT = rhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
5759   assert ((lhsQID && rhsOPT) && "ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible");
5760 
5761   for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
5762        E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5763     bool match = false;
5764     ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I;
5765     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsOPT->qual_begin(),
5766          E = rhsOPT->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
5767       ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
5768       if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto)) {
5769         match = true;
5770         break;
5771       }
5772     }
5773     if (!match)
5774       return false;
5775   }
5776   return true;
5777 }
5778 
5779 /// ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible - We know that one of lhs/rhs is an
5780 /// ObjCQualifiedIDType.
5781 bool ASTContext::ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,
5782                                                    bool compare) {
5783   // Allow id<P..> and an 'id' or void* type in all cases.
5784   if (lhs->isVoidPointerType() ||
5785       lhs->isObjCIdType() || lhs->isObjCClassType())
5786     return true;
5787   else if (rhs->isVoidPointerType() ||
5788            rhs->isObjCIdType() || rhs->isObjCClassType())
5789     return true;
5790 
5791   if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsQID = lhs->getAsObjCQualifiedIdType()) {
5792     const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsOPT = rhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
5793 
5794     if (!rhsOPT) return false;
5795 
5796     if (rhsOPT->qual_empty()) {
5797       // If the RHS is a unqualified interface pointer "NSString*",
5798       // make sure we check the class hierarchy.
5799       if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *rhsID = rhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) {
5800         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
5801              E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5802           // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs,
5803           // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
5804           // through its super class and categories.
5805           if (!rhsID->ClassImplementsProtocol(*I, true))
5806             return false;
5807         }
5808       }
5809       // If there are no qualifiers and no interface, we have an 'id'.
5810       return true;
5811     }
5812     // Both the right and left sides have qualifiers.
5813     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
5814          E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5815       ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I;
5816       bool match = false;
5817 
5818       // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs,
5819       // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
5820       // through its super class and categories.
5821       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsOPT->qual_begin(),
5822            E = rhsOPT->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
5823         ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
5824         if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) ||
5825             (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) {
5826           match = true;
5827           break;
5828         }
5829       }
5830       // If the RHS is a qualified interface pointer "NSString<P>*",
5831       // make sure we check the class hierarchy.
5832       if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *rhsID = rhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) {
5833         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
5834              E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5835           // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs,
5836           // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
5837           // through its super class and categories.
5838           if (rhsID->ClassImplementsProtocol(*I, true)) {
5839             match = true;
5840             break;
5841           }
5842         }
5843       }
5844       if (!match)
5845         return false;
5846     }
5847 
5848     return true;
5849   }
5850 
5851   const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsQID = rhs->getAsObjCQualifiedIdType();
5852   assert(rhsQID && "One of the LHS/RHS should be id<x>");
5853 
5854   if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsOPT =
5855         lhs->getAsObjCInterfacePointerType()) {
5856     // If both the right and left sides have qualifiers.
5857     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsOPT->qual_begin(),
5858          E = lhsOPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5859       ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I;
5860       bool match = false;
5861 
5862       // when comparing an id<P> on rhs with a static type on lhs,
5863       // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
5864       // through its super class and categories.
5865       // First, lhs protocols in the qualifier list must be found, direct
5866       // or indirect in rhs's qualifier list or it is a mismatch.
5867       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsQID->qual_begin(),
5868            E = rhsQID->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
5869         ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
5870         if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) ||
5871             (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) {
5872           match = true;
5873           break;
5874         }
5875       }
5876       if (!match)
5877         return false;
5878     }
5879 
5880     // Static class's protocols, or its super class or category protocols
5881     // must be found, direct or indirect in rhs's qualifier list or it is a mismatch.
5882     if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *lhsID = lhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) {
5883       llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> LHSInheritedProtocols;
5884       CollectInheritedProtocols(lhsID, LHSInheritedProtocols);
5885       // This is rather dubious but matches gcc's behavior. If lhs has
5886       // no type qualifier and its class has no static protocol(s)
5887       // assume that it is mismatch.
5888       if (LHSInheritedProtocols.empty() && lhsOPT->qual_empty())
5889         return false;
5890       for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I =
5891            LHSInheritedProtocols.begin(),
5892            E = LHSInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I) {
5893         bool match = false;
5894         ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = (*I);
5895         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsQID->qual_begin(),
5896              E = rhsQID->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
5897           ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
5898           if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) ||
5899               (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) {
5900             match = true;
5901             break;
5902           }
5903         }
5904         if (!match)
5905           return false;
5906       }
5907     }
5908     return true;
5909   }
5910   return false;
5911 }
5912 
5913 /// canAssignObjCInterfaces - Return true if the two interface types are
5914 /// compatible for assignment from RHS to LHS.  This handles validation of any
5915 /// protocol qualifiers on the LHS or RHS.
5916 ///
5917 bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfaces(const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT,
5918                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT) {
5919   const ObjCObjectType* LHS = LHSOPT->getObjectType();
5920   const ObjCObjectType* RHS = RHSOPT->getObjectType();
5921 
5922   // If either type represents the built-in 'id' or 'Class' types, return true.
5923   if (LHS->isObjCUnqualifiedIdOrClass() ||
5924       RHS->isObjCUnqualifiedIdOrClass())
5925     return true;
5926 
5927   if (LHS->isObjCQualifiedId() || RHS->isObjCQualifiedId())
5928     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0),
5929                                              QualType(RHSOPT,0),
5930                                              false);
5931 
5932   if (LHS->isObjCQualifiedClass() && RHS->isObjCQualifiedClass())
5933     return ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0),
5934                                                 QualType(RHSOPT,0));
5935 
5936   // If we have 2 user-defined types, fall into that path.
5937   if (LHS->getInterface() && RHS->getInterface())
5938     return canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS, RHS);
5939 
5940   return false;
5941 }
5942 
5943 /// canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer - This routine is specifically written
5944 /// for providing type-safety for objective-c pointers used to pass/return
5945 /// arguments in block literals. When passed as arguments, passing 'A*' where
5946 /// 'id' is expected is not OK. Passing 'Sub *" where 'Super *" is expected is
5947 /// not OK. For the return type, the opposite is not OK.
5948 bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer(
5949                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT,
5950                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT,
5951                                          bool BlockReturnType) {
5952   if (RHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType() || LHSOPT->isObjCIdType())
5953     return true;
5954 
5955   if (LHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType()) {
5956     return RHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType() || RHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType();
5957   }
5958 
5959   if (LHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType() || RHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType())
5960     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0),
5961                                              QualType(RHSOPT,0),
5962                                              false);
5963 
5964   const ObjCInterfaceType* LHS = LHSOPT->getInterfaceType();
5965   const ObjCInterfaceType* RHS = RHSOPT->getInterfaceType();
5966   if (LHS && RHS)  { // We have 2 user-defined types.
5967     if (LHS != RHS) {
5968       if (LHS->getDecl()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getDecl()))
5969         return BlockReturnType;
5970       if (RHS->getDecl()->isSuperClassOf(LHS->getDecl()))
5971         return !BlockReturnType;
5972     }
5973     else
5974       return true;
5975   }
5976   return false;
5977 }
5978 
5979 /// getIntersectionOfProtocols - This routine finds the intersection of set
5980 /// of protocols inherited from two distinct objective-c pointer objects.
5981 /// It is used to build composite qualifier list of the composite type of
5982 /// the conditional expression involving two objective-c pointer objects.
5983 static
5984 void getIntersectionOfProtocols(ASTContext &Context,
5985                                 const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT,
5986                                 const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT,
5987       SmallVectorImpl<ObjCProtocolDecl *> &IntersectionOfProtocols) {
5988 
5989   const ObjCObjectType* LHS = LHSOPT->getObjectType();
5990   const ObjCObjectType* RHS = RHSOPT->getObjectType();
5991   assert(LHS->getInterface() && "LHS must have an interface base");
5992   assert(RHS->getInterface() && "RHS must have an interface base");
5993 
5994   llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> InheritedProtocolSet;
5995   unsigned LHSNumProtocols = LHS->getNumProtocols();
5996   if (LHSNumProtocols > 0)
5997     InheritedProtocolSet.insert(LHS->qual_begin(), LHS->qual_end());
5998   else {
5999     llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> LHSInheritedProtocols;
6000     Context.CollectInheritedProtocols(LHS->getInterface(),
6001                                       LHSInheritedProtocols);
6002     InheritedProtocolSet.insert(LHSInheritedProtocols.begin(),
6003                                 LHSInheritedProtocols.end());
6004   }
6005 
6006   unsigned RHSNumProtocols = RHS->getNumProtocols();
6007   if (RHSNumProtocols > 0) {
6008     ObjCProtocolDecl **RHSProtocols =
6009       const_cast<ObjCProtocolDecl **>(RHS->qual_begin());
6010     for (unsigned i = 0; i < RHSNumProtocols; ++i)
6011       if (InheritedProtocolSet.count(RHSProtocols[i]))
6012         IntersectionOfProtocols.push_back(RHSProtocols[i]);
6013   } else {
6014     llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> RHSInheritedProtocols;
6015     Context.CollectInheritedProtocols(RHS->getInterface(),
6016                                       RHSInheritedProtocols);
6017     for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I =
6018          RHSInheritedProtocols.begin(),
6019          E = RHSInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I)
6020       if (InheritedProtocolSet.count((*I)))
6021         IntersectionOfProtocols.push_back((*I));
6022   }
6023 }
6024 
6025 /// areCommonBaseCompatible - Returns common base class of the two classes if
6026 /// one found. Note that this is O'2 algorithm. But it will be called as the
6027 /// last type comparison in a ?-exp of ObjC pointer types before a
6028 /// warning is issued. So, its invokation is extremely rare.
6029 QualType ASTContext::areCommonBaseCompatible(
6030                                           const ObjCObjectPointerType *Lptr,
6031                                           const ObjCObjectPointerType *Rptr) {
6032   const ObjCObjectType *LHS = Lptr->getObjectType();
6033   const ObjCObjectType *RHS = Rptr->getObjectType();
6034   const ObjCInterfaceDecl* LDecl = LHS->getInterface();
6035   const ObjCInterfaceDecl* RDecl = RHS->getInterface();
6036   if (!LDecl || !RDecl || (declaresSameEntity(LDecl, RDecl)))
6037     return QualType();
6038 
6039   do {
6040     LHS = cast<ObjCInterfaceType>(getObjCInterfaceType(LDecl));
6041     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS, RHS)) {
6042       SmallVector<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> Protocols;
6043       getIntersectionOfProtocols(*this, Lptr, Rptr, Protocols);
6044 
6045       QualType Result = QualType(LHS, 0);
6046       if (!Protocols.empty())
6047         Result = getObjCObjectType(Result, Protocols.data(), Protocols.size());
6048       Result = getObjCObjectPointerType(Result);
6049       return Result;
6050     }
6051   } while ((LDecl = LDecl->getSuperClass()));
6052 
6053   return QualType();
6054 }
6055 
6056 bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfaces(const ObjCObjectType *LHS,
6057                                          const ObjCObjectType *RHS) {
6058   assert(LHS->getInterface() && "LHS is not an interface type");
6059   assert(RHS->getInterface() && "RHS is not an interface type");
6060 
6061   // Verify that the base decls are compatible: the RHS must be a subclass of
6062   // the LHS.
6063   if (!LHS->getInterface()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getInterface()))
6064     return false;
6065 
6066   // RHS must have a superset of the protocols in the LHS.  If the LHS is not
6067   // protocol qualified at all, then we are good.
6068   if (LHS->getNumProtocols() == 0)
6069     return true;
6070 
6071   // Okay, we know the LHS has protocol qualifiers.  If the RHS doesn't,
6072   // more detailed analysis is required.
6073   if (RHS->getNumProtocols() == 0) {
6074     // OK, if LHS is a superclass of RHS *and*
6075     // this superclass is assignment compatible with LHS.
6076     // false otherwise.
6077     bool IsSuperClass =
6078       LHS->getInterface()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getInterface());
6079     if (IsSuperClass) {
6080       // OK if conversion of LHS to SuperClass results in narrowing of types
6081       // ; i.e., SuperClass may implement at least one of the protocols
6082       // in LHS's protocol list. Example, SuperObj<P1> = lhs<P1,P2> is ok.
6083       // But not SuperObj<P1,P2,P3> = lhs<P1,P2>.
6084       llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> SuperClassInheritedProtocols;
6085       CollectInheritedProtocols(RHS->getInterface(), SuperClassInheritedProtocols);
6086       // If super class has no protocols, it is not a match.
6087       if (SuperClassInheritedProtocols.empty())
6088         return false;
6089 
6090       for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator LHSPI = LHS->qual_begin(),
6091            LHSPE = LHS->qual_end();
6092            LHSPI != LHSPE; LHSPI++) {
6093         bool SuperImplementsProtocol = false;
6094         ObjCProtocolDecl *LHSProto = (*LHSPI);
6095 
6096         for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I =
6097              SuperClassInheritedProtocols.begin(),
6098              E = SuperClassInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I) {
6099           ObjCProtocolDecl *SuperClassProto = (*I);
6100           if (SuperClassProto->lookupProtocolNamed(LHSProto->getIdentifier())) {
6101             SuperImplementsProtocol = true;
6102             break;
6103           }
6104         }
6105         if (!SuperImplementsProtocol)
6106           return false;
6107       }
6108       return true;
6109     }
6110     return false;
6111   }
6112 
6113   for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator LHSPI = LHS->qual_begin(),
6114                                      LHSPE = LHS->qual_end();
6115        LHSPI != LHSPE; LHSPI++) {
6116     bool RHSImplementsProtocol = false;
6117 
6118     // If the RHS doesn't implement the protocol on the left, the types
6119     // are incompatible.
6120     for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator RHSPI = RHS->qual_begin(),
6121                                        RHSPE = RHS->qual_end();
6122          RHSPI != RHSPE; RHSPI++) {
6123       if ((*RHSPI)->lookupProtocolNamed((*LHSPI)->getIdentifier())) {
6124         RHSImplementsProtocol = true;
6125         break;
6126       }
6127     }
6128     // FIXME: For better diagnostics, consider passing back the protocol name.
6129     if (!RHSImplementsProtocol)
6130       return false;
6131   }
6132   // The RHS implements all protocols listed on the LHS.
6133   return true;
6134 }
6135 
6136 bool ASTContext::areComparableObjCPointerTypes(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6137   // get the "pointed to" types
6138   const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
6139   const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
6140 
6141   if (!LHSOPT || !RHSOPT)
6142     return false;
6143 
6144   return canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSOPT, RHSOPT) ||
6145          canAssignObjCInterfaces(RHSOPT, LHSOPT);
6146 }
6147 
6148 bool ASTContext::canBindObjCObjectType(QualType To, QualType From) {
6149   return canAssignObjCInterfaces(
6150                 getObjCObjectPointerType(To)->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6151                 getObjCObjectPointerType(From)->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>());
6152 }
6153 
6154 /// typesAreCompatible - C99 6.7.3p9: For two qualified types to be compatible,
6155 /// both shall have the identically qualified version of a compatible type.
6156 /// C99 6.2.7p1: Two types have compatible types if their types are the
6157 /// same. See 6.7.[2,3,5] for additional rules.
6158 bool ASTContext::typesAreCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS,
6159                                     bool CompareUnqualified) {
6160   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
6161     return hasSameType(LHS, RHS);
6162 
6163   return !mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, false, CompareUnqualified).isNull();
6164 }
6165 
6166 bool ASTContext::propertyTypesAreCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6167   return typesAreCompatible(LHS, RHS);
6168 }
6169 
6170 bool ASTContext::typesAreBlockPointerCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6171   return !mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, true).isNull();
6172 }
6173 
6174 /// mergeTransparentUnionType - if T is a transparent union type and a member
6175 /// of T is compatible with SubType, return the merged type, else return
6176 /// QualType()
6177 QualType ASTContext::mergeTransparentUnionType(QualType T, QualType SubType,
6178                                                bool OfBlockPointer,
6179                                                bool Unqualified) {
6180   if (const RecordType *UT = T->getAsUnionType()) {
6181     RecordDecl *UD = UT->getDecl();
6182     if (UD->hasAttr<TransparentUnionAttr>()) {
6183       for (RecordDecl::field_iterator it = UD->field_begin(),
6184            itend = UD->field_end(); it != itend; ++it) {
6185         QualType ET = it->getType().getUnqualifiedType();
6186         QualType MT = mergeTypes(ET, SubType, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified);
6187         if (!MT.isNull())
6188           return MT;
6189       }
6190     }
6191   }
6192 
6193   return QualType();
6194 }
6195 
6196 /// mergeFunctionArgumentTypes - merge two types which appear as function
6197 /// argument types
6198 QualType ASTContext::mergeFunctionArgumentTypes(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,
6199                                                 bool OfBlockPointer,
6200                                                 bool Unqualified) {
6201   // GNU extension: two types are compatible if they appear as a function
6202   // argument, one of the types is a transparent union type and the other
6203   // type is compatible with a union member
6204   QualType lmerge = mergeTransparentUnionType(lhs, rhs, OfBlockPointer,
6205                                               Unqualified);
6206   if (!lmerge.isNull())
6207     return lmerge;
6208 
6209   QualType rmerge = mergeTransparentUnionType(rhs, lhs, OfBlockPointer,
6210                                               Unqualified);
6211   if (!rmerge.isNull())
6212     return rmerge;
6213 
6214   return mergeTypes(lhs, rhs, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified);
6215 }
6216 
6217 QualType ASTContext::mergeFunctionTypes(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,
6218                                         bool OfBlockPointer,
6219                                         bool Unqualified) {
6220   const FunctionType *lbase = lhs->getAs<FunctionType>();
6221   const FunctionType *rbase = rhs->getAs<FunctionType>();
6222   const FunctionProtoType *lproto = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(lbase);
6223   const FunctionProtoType *rproto = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(rbase);
6224   bool allLTypes = true;
6225   bool allRTypes = true;
6226 
6227   // Check return type
6228   QualType retType;
6229   if (OfBlockPointer) {
6230     QualType RHS = rbase->getResultType();
6231     QualType LHS = lbase->getResultType();
6232     bool UnqualifiedResult = Unqualified;
6233     if (!UnqualifiedResult)
6234       UnqualifiedResult = (!RHS.hasQualifiers() && LHS.hasQualifiers());
6235     retType = mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, true, UnqualifiedResult, true);
6236   }
6237   else
6238     retType = mergeTypes(lbase->getResultType(), rbase->getResultType(), false,
6239                          Unqualified);
6240   if (retType.isNull()) return QualType();
6241 
6242   if (Unqualified)
6243     retType = retType.getUnqualifiedType();
6244 
6245   CanQualType LRetType = getCanonicalType(lbase->getResultType());
6246   CanQualType RRetType = getCanonicalType(rbase->getResultType());
6247   if (Unqualified) {
6248     LRetType = LRetType.getUnqualifiedType();
6249     RRetType = RRetType.getUnqualifiedType();
6250   }
6251 
6252   if (getCanonicalType(retType) != LRetType)
6253     allLTypes = false;
6254   if (getCanonicalType(retType) != RRetType)
6255     allRTypes = false;
6256 
6257   // FIXME: double check this
6258   // FIXME: should we error if lbase->getRegParmAttr() != 0 &&
6259   //                           rbase->getRegParmAttr() != 0 &&
6260   //                           lbase->getRegParmAttr() != rbase->getRegParmAttr()?
6261   FunctionType::ExtInfo lbaseInfo = lbase->getExtInfo();
6262   FunctionType::ExtInfo rbaseInfo = rbase->getExtInfo();
6263 
6264   // Compatible functions must have compatible calling conventions
6265   if (!isSameCallConv(lbaseInfo.getCC(), rbaseInfo.getCC()))
6266     return QualType();
6267 
6268   // Regparm is part of the calling convention.
6269   if (lbaseInfo.getHasRegParm() != rbaseInfo.getHasRegParm())
6270     return QualType();
6271   if (lbaseInfo.getRegParm() != rbaseInfo.getRegParm())
6272     return QualType();
6273 
6274   if (lbaseInfo.getProducesResult() != rbaseInfo.getProducesResult())
6275     return QualType();
6276 
6277   // functypes which return are preferred over those that do not.
6278   if (lbaseInfo.getNoReturn() && !rbaseInfo.getNoReturn())
6279     allLTypes = false;
6280   else if (!lbaseInfo.getNoReturn() && rbaseInfo.getNoReturn())
6281     allRTypes = false;
6282   // FIXME: some uses, e.g. conditional exprs, really want this to be 'both'.
6283   bool NoReturn = lbaseInfo.getNoReturn() || rbaseInfo.getNoReturn();
6284 
6285   FunctionType::ExtInfo einfo = lbaseInfo.withNoReturn(NoReturn);
6286 
6287   if (lproto && rproto) { // two C99 style function prototypes
6288     assert(!lproto->hasExceptionSpec() && !rproto->hasExceptionSpec() &&
6289            "C++ shouldn't be here");
6290     unsigned lproto_nargs = lproto->getNumArgs();
6291     unsigned rproto_nargs = rproto->getNumArgs();
6292 
6293     // Compatible functions must have the same number of arguments
6294     if (lproto_nargs != rproto_nargs)
6295       return QualType();
6296 
6297     // Variadic and non-variadic functions aren't compatible
6298     if (lproto->isVariadic() != rproto->isVariadic())
6299       return QualType();
6300 
6301     if (lproto->getTypeQuals() != rproto->getTypeQuals())
6302       return QualType();
6303 
6304     if (LangOpts.ObjCAutoRefCount &&
6305         !FunctionTypesMatchOnNSConsumedAttrs(rproto, lproto))
6306       return QualType();
6307 
6308     // Check argument compatibility
6309     SmallVector<QualType, 10> types;
6310     for (unsigned i = 0; i < lproto_nargs; i++) {
6311       QualType largtype = lproto->getArgType(i).getUnqualifiedType();
6312       QualType rargtype = rproto->getArgType(i).getUnqualifiedType();
6313       QualType argtype = mergeFunctionArgumentTypes(largtype, rargtype,
6314                                                     OfBlockPointer,
6315                                                     Unqualified);
6316       if (argtype.isNull()) return QualType();
6317 
6318       if (Unqualified)
6319         argtype = argtype.getUnqualifiedType();
6320 
6321       types.push_back(argtype);
6322       if (Unqualified) {
6323         largtype = largtype.getUnqualifiedType();
6324         rargtype = rargtype.getUnqualifiedType();
6325       }
6326 
6327       if (getCanonicalType(argtype) != getCanonicalType(largtype))
6328         allLTypes = false;
6329       if (getCanonicalType(argtype) != getCanonicalType(rargtype))
6330         allRTypes = false;
6331     }
6332 
6333     if (allLTypes) return lhs;
6334     if (allRTypes) return rhs;
6335 
6336     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = lproto->getExtProtoInfo();
6337     EPI.ExtInfo = einfo;
6338     return getFunctionType(retType, types.begin(), types.size(), EPI);
6339   }
6340 
6341   if (lproto) allRTypes = false;
6342   if (rproto) allLTypes = false;
6343 
6344   const FunctionProtoType *proto = lproto ? lproto : rproto;
6345   if (proto) {
6346     assert(!proto->hasExceptionSpec() && "C++ shouldn't be here");
6347     if (proto->isVariadic()) return QualType();
6348     // Check that the types are compatible with the types that
6349     // would result from default argument promotions (C99 6.7.5.3p15).
6350     // The only types actually affected are promotable integer
6351     // types and floats, which would be passed as a different
6352     // type depending on whether the prototype is visible.
6353     unsigned proto_nargs = proto->getNumArgs();
6354     for (unsigned i = 0; i < proto_nargs; ++i) {
6355       QualType argTy = proto->getArgType(i);
6356 
6357       // Look at the promotion type of enum types, since that is the type used
6358       // to pass enum values.
6359       if (const EnumType *Enum = argTy->getAs<EnumType>())
6360         argTy = Enum->getDecl()->getPromotionType();
6361 
6362       if (argTy->isPromotableIntegerType() ||
6363           getCanonicalType(argTy).getUnqualifiedType() == FloatTy)
6364         return QualType();
6365     }
6366 
6367     if (allLTypes) return lhs;
6368     if (allRTypes) return rhs;
6369 
6370     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = proto->getExtProtoInfo();
6371     EPI.ExtInfo = einfo;
6372     return getFunctionType(retType, proto->arg_type_begin(),
6373                            proto->getNumArgs(), EPI);
6374   }
6375 
6376   if (allLTypes) return lhs;
6377   if (allRTypes) return rhs;
6378   return getFunctionNoProtoType(retType, einfo);
6379 }
6380 
6381 QualType ASTContext::mergeTypes(QualType LHS, QualType RHS,
6382                                 bool OfBlockPointer,
6383                                 bool Unqualified, bool BlockReturnType) {
6384   // C++ [expr]: If an expression initially has the type "reference to T", the
6385   // type is adjusted to "T" prior to any further analysis, the expression
6386   // designates the object or function denoted by the reference, and the
6387   // expression is an lvalue unless the reference is an rvalue reference and
6388   // the expression is a function call (possibly inside parentheses).
6389   assert(!LHS->getAs<ReferenceType>() && "LHS is a reference type?");
6390   assert(!RHS->getAs<ReferenceType>() && "RHS is a reference type?");
6391 
6392   if (Unqualified) {
6393     LHS = LHS.getUnqualifiedType();
6394     RHS = RHS.getUnqualifiedType();
6395   }
6396 
6397   QualType LHSCan = getCanonicalType(LHS),
6398            RHSCan = getCanonicalType(RHS);
6399 
6400   // If two types are identical, they are compatible.
6401   if (LHSCan == RHSCan)
6402     return LHS;
6403 
6404   // If the qualifiers are different, the types aren't compatible... mostly.
6405   Qualifiers LQuals = LHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
6406   Qualifiers RQuals = RHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
6407   if (LQuals != RQuals) {
6408     // If any of these qualifiers are different, we have a type
6409     // mismatch.
6410     if (LQuals.getCVRQualifiers() != RQuals.getCVRQualifiers() ||
6411         LQuals.getAddressSpace() != RQuals.getAddressSpace() ||
6412         LQuals.getObjCLifetime() != RQuals.getObjCLifetime())
6413       return QualType();
6414 
6415     // Exactly one GC qualifier difference is allowed: __strong is
6416     // okay if the other type has no GC qualifier but is an Objective
6417     // C object pointer (i.e. implicitly strong by default).  We fix
6418     // this by pretending that the unqualified type was actually
6419     // qualified __strong.
6420     Qualifiers::GC GC_L = LQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
6421     Qualifiers::GC GC_R = RQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
6422     assert((GC_L != GC_R) && "unequal qualifier sets had only equal elements");
6423 
6424     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Weak || GC_R == Qualifiers::Weak)
6425       return QualType();
6426 
6427     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Strong && RHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) {
6428       return mergeTypes(LHS, getObjCGCQualType(RHS, Qualifiers::Strong));
6429     }
6430     if (GC_R == Qualifiers::Strong && LHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) {
6431       return mergeTypes(getObjCGCQualType(LHS, Qualifiers::Strong), RHS);
6432     }
6433     return QualType();
6434   }
6435 
6436   // Okay, qualifiers are equal.
6437 
6438   Type::TypeClass LHSClass = LHSCan->getTypeClass();
6439   Type::TypeClass RHSClass = RHSCan->getTypeClass();
6440 
6441   // We want to consider the two function types to be the same for these
6442   // comparisons, just force one to the other.
6443   if (LHSClass == Type::FunctionProto) LHSClass = Type::FunctionNoProto;
6444   if (RHSClass == Type::FunctionProto) RHSClass = Type::FunctionNoProto;
6445 
6446   // Same as above for arrays
6447   if (LHSClass == Type::VariableArray || LHSClass == Type::IncompleteArray)
6448     LHSClass = Type::ConstantArray;
6449   if (RHSClass == Type::VariableArray || RHSClass == Type::IncompleteArray)
6450     RHSClass = Type::ConstantArray;
6451 
6452   // ObjCInterfaces are just specialized ObjCObjects.
6453   if (LHSClass == Type::ObjCInterface) LHSClass = Type::ObjCObject;
6454   if (RHSClass == Type::ObjCInterface) RHSClass = Type::ObjCObject;
6455 
6456   // Canonicalize ExtVector -> Vector.
6457   if (LHSClass == Type::ExtVector) LHSClass = Type::Vector;
6458   if (RHSClass == Type::ExtVector) RHSClass = Type::Vector;
6459 
6460   // If the canonical type classes don't match.
6461   if (LHSClass != RHSClass) {
6462     // C99 6.7.2.2p4: Each enumerated type shall be compatible with char,
6463     // a signed integer type, or an unsigned integer type.
6464     // Compatibility is based on the underlying type, not the promotion
6465     // type.
6466     if (const EnumType* ETy = LHS->getAs<EnumType>()) {
6467       QualType TINT = ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6468       if (!TINT.isNull() && hasSameType(TINT, RHSCan.getUnqualifiedType()))
6469         return RHS;
6470     }
6471     if (const EnumType* ETy = RHS->getAs<EnumType>()) {
6472       QualType TINT = ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6473       if (!TINT.isNull() && hasSameType(TINT, LHSCan.getUnqualifiedType()))
6474         return LHS;
6475     }
6476     // allow block pointer type to match an 'id' type.
6477     if (OfBlockPointer && !BlockReturnType) {
6478        if (LHS->isObjCIdType() && RHS->isBlockPointerType())
6479          return LHS;
6480       if (RHS->isObjCIdType() && LHS->isBlockPointerType())
6481         return RHS;
6482     }
6483 
6484     return QualType();
6485   }
6486 
6487   // The canonical type classes match.
6488   switch (LHSClass) {
6489 #define TYPE(Class, Base)
6490 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base)
6491 #define NON_CANONICAL_UNLESS_DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
6492 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
6493 #define DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
6494 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
6495     llvm_unreachable("Non-canonical and dependent types shouldn't get here");
6496 
6497   case Type::LValueReference:
6498   case Type::RValueReference:
6499   case Type::MemberPointer:
6500     llvm_unreachable("C++ should never be in mergeTypes");
6501 
6502   case Type::ObjCInterface:
6503   case Type::IncompleteArray:
6504   case Type::VariableArray:
6505   case Type::FunctionProto:
6506   case Type::ExtVector:
6507     llvm_unreachable("Types are eliminated above");
6508 
6509   case Type::Pointer:
6510   {
6511     // Merge two pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info
6512     QualType LHSPointee = LHS->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6513     QualType RHSPointee = RHS->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6514     if (Unqualified) {
6515       LHSPointee = LHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
6516       RHSPointee = RHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
6517     }
6518     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSPointee, RHSPointee, false,
6519                                      Unqualified);
6520     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
6521     if (getCanonicalType(LHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6522       return LHS;
6523     if (getCanonicalType(RHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6524       return RHS;
6525     return getPointerType(ResultType);
6526   }
6527   case Type::BlockPointer:
6528   {
6529     // Merge two block pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info
6530     QualType LHSPointee = LHS->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6531     QualType RHSPointee = RHS->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6532     if (Unqualified) {
6533       LHSPointee = LHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
6534       RHSPointee = RHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
6535     }
6536     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSPointee, RHSPointee, OfBlockPointer,
6537                                      Unqualified);
6538     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
6539     if (getCanonicalType(LHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6540       return LHS;
6541     if (getCanonicalType(RHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6542       return RHS;
6543     return getBlockPointerType(ResultType);
6544   }
6545   case Type::Atomic:
6546   {
6547     // Merge two pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info
6548     QualType LHSValue = LHS->getAs<AtomicType>()->getValueType();
6549     QualType RHSValue = RHS->getAs<AtomicType>()->getValueType();
6550     if (Unqualified) {
6551       LHSValue = LHSValue.getUnqualifiedType();
6552       RHSValue = RHSValue.getUnqualifiedType();
6553     }
6554     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSValue, RHSValue, false,
6555                                      Unqualified);
6556     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
6557     if (getCanonicalType(LHSValue) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6558       return LHS;
6559     if (getCanonicalType(RHSValue) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6560       return RHS;
6561     return getAtomicType(ResultType);
6562   }
6563   case Type::ConstantArray:
6564   {
6565     const ConstantArrayType* LCAT = getAsConstantArrayType(LHS);
6566     const ConstantArrayType* RCAT = getAsConstantArrayType(RHS);
6567     if (LCAT && RCAT && RCAT->getSize() != LCAT->getSize())
6568       return QualType();
6569 
6570     QualType LHSElem = getAsArrayType(LHS)->getElementType();
6571     QualType RHSElem = getAsArrayType(RHS)->getElementType();
6572     if (Unqualified) {
6573       LHSElem = LHSElem.getUnqualifiedType();
6574       RHSElem = RHSElem.getUnqualifiedType();
6575     }
6576 
6577     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSElem, RHSElem, false, Unqualified);
6578     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
6579     if (LCAT && getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6580       return LHS;
6581     if (RCAT && getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6582       return RHS;
6583     if (LCAT) return getConstantArrayType(ResultType, LCAT->getSize(),
6584                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0);
6585     if (RCAT) return getConstantArrayType(ResultType, RCAT->getSize(),
6586                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0);
6587     const VariableArrayType* LVAT = getAsVariableArrayType(LHS);
6588     const VariableArrayType* RVAT = getAsVariableArrayType(RHS);
6589     if (LVAT && getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6590       return LHS;
6591     if (RVAT && getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6592       return RHS;
6593     if (LVAT) {
6594       // FIXME: This isn't correct! But tricky to implement because
6595       // the array's size has to be the size of LHS, but the type
6596       // has to be different.
6597       return LHS;
6598     }
6599     if (RVAT) {
6600       // FIXME: This isn't correct! But tricky to implement because
6601       // the array's size has to be the size of RHS, but the type
6602       // has to be different.
6603       return RHS;
6604     }
6605     if (getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) return LHS;
6606     if (getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) return RHS;
6607     return getIncompleteArrayType(ResultType,
6608                                   ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0);
6609   }
6610   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
6611     return mergeFunctionTypes(LHS, RHS, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified);
6612   case Type::Record:
6613   case Type::Enum:
6614     return QualType();
6615   case Type::Builtin:
6616     // Only exactly equal builtin types are compatible, which is tested above.
6617     return QualType();
6618   case Type::Complex:
6619     // Distinct complex types are incompatible.
6620     return QualType();
6621   case Type::Vector:
6622     // FIXME: The merged type should be an ExtVector!
6623     if (areCompatVectorTypes(LHSCan->getAs<VectorType>(),
6624                              RHSCan->getAs<VectorType>()))
6625       return LHS;
6626     return QualType();
6627   case Type::ObjCObject: {
6628     // Check if the types are assignment compatible.
6629     // FIXME: This should be type compatibility, e.g. whether
6630     // "LHS x; RHS x;" at global scope is legal.
6631     const ObjCObjectType* LHSIface = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectType>();
6632     const ObjCObjectType* RHSIface = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectType>();
6633     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSIface, RHSIface))
6634       return LHS;
6635 
6636     return QualType();
6637   }
6638   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer: {
6639     if (OfBlockPointer) {
6640       if (canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer(
6641                                           LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6642                                           RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6643                                           BlockReturnType))
6644         return LHS;
6645       return QualType();
6646     }
6647     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6648                                 RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()))
6649       return LHS;
6650 
6651     return QualType();
6652   }
6653   }
6654 
6655   llvm_unreachable("Invalid Type::Class!");
6656 }
6657 
6658 bool ASTContext::FunctionTypesMatchOnNSConsumedAttrs(
6659                    const FunctionProtoType *FromFunctionType,
6660                    const FunctionProtoType *ToFunctionType) {
6661   if (FromFunctionType->hasAnyConsumedArgs() !=
6662       ToFunctionType->hasAnyConsumedArgs())
6663     return false;
6664   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo FromEPI =
6665     FromFunctionType->getExtProtoInfo();
6666   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo ToEPI =
6667     ToFunctionType->getExtProtoInfo();
6668   if (FromEPI.ConsumedArguments && ToEPI.ConsumedArguments)
6669     for (unsigned ArgIdx = 0, NumArgs = FromFunctionType->getNumArgs();
6670          ArgIdx != NumArgs; ++ArgIdx)  {
6671       if (FromEPI.ConsumedArguments[ArgIdx] !=
6672           ToEPI.ConsumedArguments[ArgIdx])
6673         return false;
6674     }
6675   return true;
6676 }
6677 
6678 /// mergeObjCGCQualifiers - This routine merges ObjC's GC attribute of 'LHS' and
6679 /// 'RHS' attributes and returns the merged version; including for function
6680 /// return types.
6681 QualType ASTContext::mergeObjCGCQualifiers(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6682   QualType LHSCan = getCanonicalType(LHS),
6683   RHSCan = getCanonicalType(RHS);
6684   // If two types are identical, they are compatible.
6685   if (LHSCan == RHSCan)
6686     return LHS;
6687   if (RHSCan->isFunctionType()) {
6688     if (!LHSCan->isFunctionType())
6689       return QualType();
6690     QualType OldReturnType =
6691       cast<FunctionType>(RHSCan.getTypePtr())->getResultType();
6692     QualType NewReturnType =
6693       cast<FunctionType>(LHSCan.getTypePtr())->getResultType();
6694     QualType ResReturnType =
6695       mergeObjCGCQualifiers(NewReturnType, OldReturnType);
6696     if (ResReturnType.isNull())
6697       return QualType();
6698     if (ResReturnType == NewReturnType || ResReturnType == OldReturnType) {
6699       // id foo(); ... __strong id foo(); or: __strong id foo(); ... id foo();
6700       // In either case, use OldReturnType to build the new function type.
6701       const FunctionType *F = LHS->getAs<FunctionType>();
6702       if (const FunctionProtoType *FPT = cast<FunctionProtoType>(F)) {
6703         FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = FPT->getExtProtoInfo();
6704         EPI.ExtInfo = getFunctionExtInfo(LHS);
6705         QualType ResultType
6706           = getFunctionType(OldReturnType, FPT->arg_type_begin(),
6707                             FPT->getNumArgs(), EPI);
6708         return ResultType;
6709       }
6710     }
6711     return QualType();
6712   }
6713 
6714   // If the qualifiers are different, the types can still be merged.
6715   Qualifiers LQuals = LHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
6716   Qualifiers RQuals = RHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
6717   if (LQuals != RQuals) {
6718     // If any of these qualifiers are different, we have a type mismatch.
6719     if (LQuals.getCVRQualifiers() != RQuals.getCVRQualifiers() ||
6720         LQuals.getAddressSpace() != RQuals.getAddressSpace())
6721       return QualType();
6722 
6723     // Exactly one GC qualifier difference is allowed: __strong is
6724     // okay if the other type has no GC qualifier but is an Objective
6725     // C object pointer (i.e. implicitly strong by default).  We fix
6726     // this by pretending that the unqualified type was actually
6727     // qualified __strong.
6728     Qualifiers::GC GC_L = LQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
6729     Qualifiers::GC GC_R = RQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
6730     assert((GC_L != GC_R) && "unequal qualifier sets had only equal elements");
6731 
6732     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Weak || GC_R == Qualifiers::Weak)
6733       return QualType();
6734 
6735     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Strong)
6736       return LHS;
6737     if (GC_R == Qualifiers::Strong)
6738       return RHS;
6739     return QualType();
6740   }
6741 
6742   if (LHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType() && RHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) {
6743     QualType LHSBaseQT = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6744     QualType RHSBaseQT = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6745     QualType ResQT = mergeObjCGCQualifiers(LHSBaseQT, RHSBaseQT);
6746     if (ResQT == LHSBaseQT)
6747       return LHS;
6748     if (ResQT == RHSBaseQT)
6749       return RHS;
6750   }
6751   return QualType();
6752 }
6753 
6754 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6755 //                         Integer Predicates
6756 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6757 
6758 unsigned ASTContext::getIntWidth(QualType T) const {
6759   if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(T))
6760     T = ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6761   if (T->isBooleanType())
6762     return 1;
6763   // For builtin types, just use the standard type sizing method
6764   return (unsigned)getTypeSize(T);
6765 }
6766 
6767 QualType ASTContext::getCorrespondingUnsignedType(QualType T) {
6768   assert(T->hasSignedIntegerRepresentation() && "Unexpected type");
6769 
6770   // Turn <4 x signed int> -> <4 x unsigned int>
6771   if (const VectorType *VTy = T->getAs<VectorType>())
6772     return getVectorType(getCorrespondingUnsignedType(VTy->getElementType()),
6773                          VTy->getNumElements(), VTy->getVectorKind());
6774 
6775   // For enums, we return the unsigned version of the base type.
6776   if (const EnumType *ETy = T->getAs<EnumType>())
6777     T = ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6778 
6779   const BuiltinType *BTy = T->getAs<BuiltinType>();
6780   assert(BTy && "Unexpected signed integer type");
6781   switch (BTy->getKind()) {
6782   case BuiltinType::Char_S:
6783   case BuiltinType::SChar:
6784     return UnsignedCharTy;
6785   case BuiltinType::Short:
6786     return UnsignedShortTy;
6787   case BuiltinType::Int:
6788     return UnsignedIntTy;
6789   case BuiltinType::Long:
6790     return UnsignedLongTy;
6791   case BuiltinType::LongLong:
6792     return UnsignedLongLongTy;
6793   case BuiltinType::Int128:
6794     return UnsignedInt128Ty;
6795   default:
6796     llvm_unreachable("Unexpected signed integer type");
6797   }
6798 }
6799 
6800 ASTMutationListener::~ASTMutationListener() { }
6801 
6802 
6803 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6804 //                          Builtin Type Computation
6805 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6806 
6807 /// DecodeTypeFromStr - This decodes one type descriptor from Str, advancing the
6808 /// pointer over the consumed characters.  This returns the resultant type.  If
6809 /// AllowTypeModifiers is false then modifier like * are not parsed, just basic
6810 /// types.  This allows "v2i*" to be parsed as a pointer to a v2i instead of
6811 /// a vector of "i*".
6812 ///
6813 /// RequiresICE is filled in on return to indicate whether the value is required
6814 /// to be an Integer Constant Expression.
6815 static QualType DecodeTypeFromStr(const char *&Str, const ASTContext &Context,
6816                                   ASTContext::GetBuiltinTypeError &Error,
6817                                   bool &RequiresICE,
6818                                   bool AllowTypeModifiers) {
6819   // Modifiers.
6820   int HowLong = 0;
6821   bool Signed = false, Unsigned = false;
6822   RequiresICE = false;
6823 
6824   // Read the prefixed modifiers first.
6825   bool Done = false;
6826   while (!Done) {
6827     switch (*Str++) {
6828     default: Done = true; --Str; break;
6829     case 'I':
6830       RequiresICE = true;
6831       break;
6832     case 'S':
6833       assert(!Unsigned && "Can't use both 'S' and 'U' modifiers!");
6834       assert(!Signed && "Can't use 'S' modifier multiple times!");
6835       Signed = true;
6836       break;
6837     case 'U':
6838       assert(!Signed && "Can't use both 'S' and 'U' modifiers!");
6839       assert(!Unsigned && "Can't use 'S' modifier multiple times!");
6840       Unsigned = true;
6841       break;
6842     case 'L':
6843       assert(HowLong <= 2 && "Can't have LLLL modifier");
6844       ++HowLong;
6845       break;
6846     }
6847   }
6848 
6849   QualType Type;
6850 
6851   // Read the base type.
6852   switch (*Str++) {
6853   default: llvm_unreachable("Unknown builtin type letter!");
6854   case 'v':
6855     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned &&
6856            "Bad modifiers used with 'v'!");
6857     Type = Context.VoidTy;
6858     break;
6859   case 'f':
6860     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned &&
6861            "Bad modifiers used with 'f'!");
6862     Type = Context.FloatTy;
6863     break;
6864   case 'd':
6865     assert(HowLong < 2 && !Signed && !Unsigned &&
6866            "Bad modifiers used with 'd'!");
6867     if (HowLong)
6868       Type = Context.LongDoubleTy;
6869     else
6870       Type = Context.DoubleTy;
6871     break;
6872   case 's':
6873     assert(HowLong == 0 && "Bad modifiers used with 's'!");
6874     if (Unsigned)
6875       Type = Context.UnsignedShortTy;
6876     else
6877       Type = Context.ShortTy;
6878     break;
6879   case 'i':
6880     if (HowLong == 3)
6881       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedInt128Ty : Context.Int128Ty;
6882     else if (HowLong == 2)
6883       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedLongLongTy : Context.LongLongTy;
6884     else if (HowLong == 1)
6885       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedLongTy : Context.LongTy;
6886     else
6887       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedIntTy : Context.IntTy;
6888     break;
6889   case 'c':
6890     assert(HowLong == 0 && "Bad modifiers used with 'c'!");
6891     if (Signed)
6892       Type = Context.SignedCharTy;
6893     else if (Unsigned)
6894       Type = Context.UnsignedCharTy;
6895     else
6896       Type = Context.CharTy;
6897     break;
6898   case 'b': // boolean
6899     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'b'!");
6900     Type = Context.BoolTy;
6901     break;
6902   case 'z':  // size_t.
6903     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'z'!");
6904     Type = Context.getSizeType();
6905     break;
6906   case 'F':
6907     Type = Context.getCFConstantStringType();
6908     break;
6909   case 'G':
6910     Type = Context.getObjCIdType();
6911     break;
6912   case 'H':
6913     Type = Context.getObjCSelType();
6914     break;
6915   case 'a':
6916     Type = Context.getBuiltinVaListType();
6917     assert(!Type.isNull() && "builtin va list type not initialized!");
6918     break;
6919   case 'A':
6920     // This is a "reference" to a va_list; however, what exactly
6921     // this means depends on how va_list is defined. There are two
6922     // different kinds of va_list: ones passed by value, and ones
6923     // passed by reference.  An example of a by-value va_list is
6924     // x86, where va_list is a char*. An example of by-ref va_list
6925     // is x86-64, where va_list is a __va_list_tag[1]. For x86,
6926     // we want this argument to be a char*&; for x86-64, we want
6927     // it to be a __va_list_tag*.
6928     Type = Context.getBuiltinVaListType();
6929     assert(!Type.isNull() && "builtin va list type not initialized!");
6930     if (Type->isArrayType())
6931       Type = Context.getArrayDecayedType(Type);
6932     else
6933       Type = Context.getLValueReferenceType(Type);
6934     break;
6935   case 'V': {
6936     char *End;
6937     unsigned NumElements = strtoul(Str, &End, 10);
6938     assert(End != Str && "Missing vector size");
6939     Str = End;
6940 
6941     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error,
6942                                              RequiresICE, false);
6943     assert(!RequiresICE && "Can't require vector ICE");
6944 
6945     // TODO: No way to make AltiVec vectors in builtins yet.
6946     Type = Context.getVectorType(ElementType, NumElements,
6947                                  VectorType::GenericVector);
6948     break;
6949   }
6950   case 'E': {
6951     char *End;
6952 
6953     unsigned NumElements = strtoul(Str, &End, 10);
6954     assert(End != Str && "Missing vector size");
6955 
6956     Str = End;
6957 
6958     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error, RequiresICE,
6959                                              false);
6960     Type = Context.getExtVectorType(ElementType, NumElements);
6961     break;
6962   }
6963   case 'X': {
6964     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error, RequiresICE,
6965                                              false);
6966     assert(!RequiresICE && "Can't require complex ICE");
6967     Type = Context.getComplexType(ElementType);
6968     break;
6969   }
6970   case 'Y' : {
6971     Type = Context.getPointerDiffType();
6972     break;
6973   }
6974   case 'P':
6975     Type = Context.getFILEType();
6976     if (Type.isNull()) {
6977       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_stdio;
6978       return QualType();
6979     }
6980     break;
6981   case 'J':
6982     if (Signed)
6983       Type = Context.getsigjmp_bufType();
6984     else
6985       Type = Context.getjmp_bufType();
6986 
6987     if (Type.isNull()) {
6988       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_setjmp;
6989       return QualType();
6990     }
6991     break;
6992   case 'K':
6993     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'K'!");
6994     Type = Context.getucontext_tType();
6995 
6996     if (Type.isNull()) {
6997       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_ucontext;
6998       return QualType();
6999     }
7000     break;
7001   }
7002 
7003   // If there are modifiers and if we're allowed to parse them, go for it.
7004   Done = !AllowTypeModifiers;
7005   while (!Done) {
7006     switch (char c = *Str++) {
7007     default: Done = true; --Str; break;
7008     case '*':
7009     case '&': {
7010       // Both pointers and references can have their pointee types
7011       // qualified with an address space.
7012       char *End;
7013       unsigned AddrSpace = strtoul(Str, &End, 10);
7014       if (End != Str && AddrSpace != 0) {
7015         Type = Context.getAddrSpaceQualType(Type, AddrSpace);
7016         Str = End;
7017       }
7018       if (c == '*')
7019         Type = Context.getPointerType(Type);
7020       else
7021         Type = Context.getLValueReferenceType(Type);
7022       break;
7023     }
7024     // FIXME: There's no way to have a built-in with an rvalue ref arg.
7025     case 'C':
7026       Type = Type.withConst();
7027       break;
7028     case 'D':
7029       Type = Context.getVolatileType(Type);
7030       break;
7031     case 'R':
7032       Type = Type.withRestrict();
7033       break;
7034     }
7035   }
7036 
7037   assert((!RequiresICE || Type->isIntegralOrEnumerationType()) &&
7038          "Integer constant 'I' type must be an integer");
7039 
7040   return Type;
7041 }
7042 
7043 /// GetBuiltinType - Return the type for the specified builtin.
7044 QualType ASTContext::GetBuiltinType(unsigned Id,
7045                                     GetBuiltinTypeError &Error,
7046                                     unsigned *IntegerConstantArgs) const {
7047   const char *TypeStr = BuiltinInfo.GetTypeString(Id);
7048 
7049   SmallVector<QualType, 8> ArgTypes;
7050 
7051   bool RequiresICE = false;
7052   Error = GE_None;
7053   QualType ResType = DecodeTypeFromStr(TypeStr, *this, Error,
7054                                        RequiresICE, true);
7055   if (Error != GE_None)
7056     return QualType();
7057 
7058   assert(!RequiresICE && "Result of intrinsic cannot be required to be an ICE");
7059 
7060   while (TypeStr[0] && TypeStr[0] != '.') {
7061     QualType Ty = DecodeTypeFromStr(TypeStr, *this, Error, RequiresICE, true);
7062     if (Error != GE_None)
7063       return QualType();
7064 
7065     // If this argument is required to be an IntegerConstantExpression and the
7066     // caller cares, fill in the bitmask we return.
7067     if (RequiresICE && IntegerConstantArgs)
7068       *IntegerConstantArgs |= 1 << ArgTypes.size();
7069 
7070     // Do array -> pointer decay.  The builtin should use the decayed type.
7071     if (Ty->isArrayType())
7072       Ty = getArrayDecayedType(Ty);
7073 
7074     ArgTypes.push_back(Ty);
7075   }
7076 
7077   assert((TypeStr[0] != '.' || TypeStr[1] == 0) &&
7078          "'.' should only occur at end of builtin type list!");
7079 
7080   FunctionType::ExtInfo EI;
7081   if (BuiltinInfo.isNoReturn(Id)) EI = EI.withNoReturn(true);
7082 
7083   bool Variadic = (TypeStr[0] == '.');
7084 
7085   // We really shouldn't be making a no-proto type here, especially in C++.
7086   if (ArgTypes.empty() && Variadic)
7087     return getFunctionNoProtoType(ResType, EI);
7088 
7089   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI;
7090   EPI.ExtInfo = EI;
7091   EPI.Variadic = Variadic;
7092 
7093   return getFunctionType(ResType, ArgTypes.data(), ArgTypes.size(), EPI);
7094 }
7095 
7096 GVALinkage ASTContext::GetGVALinkageForFunction(const FunctionDecl *FD) {
7097   GVALinkage External = GVA_StrongExternal;
7098 
7099   Linkage L = FD->getLinkage();
7100   switch (L) {
7101   case NoLinkage:
7102   case InternalLinkage:
7103   case UniqueExternalLinkage:
7104     return GVA_Internal;
7105 
7106   case ExternalLinkage:
7107     switch (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind()) {
7108     case TSK_Undeclared:
7109     case TSK_ExplicitSpecialization:
7110       External = GVA_StrongExternal;
7111       break;
7112 
7113     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDefinition:
7114       return GVA_ExplicitTemplateInstantiation;
7115 
7116     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration:
7117     case TSK_ImplicitInstantiation:
7118       External = GVA_TemplateInstantiation;
7119       break;
7120     }
7121   }
7122 
7123   if (!FD->isInlined())
7124     return External;
7125 
7126   if (!getLangOpts().CPlusPlus || FD->hasAttr<GNUInlineAttr>()) {
7127     // GNU or C99 inline semantics. Determine whether this symbol should be
7128     // externally visible.
7129     if (FD->isInlineDefinitionExternallyVisible())
7130       return External;
7131 
7132     // C99 inline semantics, where the symbol is not externally visible.
7133     return GVA_C99Inline;
7134   }
7135 
7136   // C++0x [temp.explicit]p9:
7137   //   [ Note: The intent is that an inline function that is the subject of
7138   //   an explicit instantiation declaration will still be implicitly
7139   //   instantiated when used so that the body can be considered for
7140   //   inlining, but that no out-of-line copy of the inline function would be
7141   //   generated in the translation unit. -- end note ]
7142   if (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind()
7143                                        == TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration)
7144     return GVA_C99Inline;
7145 
7146   return GVA_CXXInline;
7147 }
7148 
7149 GVALinkage ASTContext::GetGVALinkageForVariable(const VarDecl *VD) {
7150   // If this is a static data member, compute the kind of template
7151   // specialization. Otherwise, this variable is not part of a
7152   // template.
7153   TemplateSpecializationKind TSK = TSK_Undeclared;
7154   if (VD->isStaticDataMember())
7155     TSK = VD->getTemplateSpecializationKind();
7156 
7157   Linkage L = VD->getLinkage();
7158   if (L == ExternalLinkage && getLangOpts().CPlusPlus &&
7159       VD->getType()->getLinkage() == UniqueExternalLinkage)
7160     L = UniqueExternalLinkage;
7161 
7162   switch (L) {
7163   case NoLinkage:
7164   case InternalLinkage:
7165   case UniqueExternalLinkage:
7166     return GVA_Internal;
7167 
7168   case ExternalLinkage:
7169     switch (TSK) {
7170     case TSK_Undeclared:
7171     case TSK_ExplicitSpecialization:
7172       return GVA_StrongExternal;
7173 
7174     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration:
7175       llvm_unreachable("Variable should not be instantiated");
7176       // Fall through to treat this like any other instantiation.
7177 
7178     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDefinition:
7179       return GVA_ExplicitTemplateInstantiation;
7180 
7181     case TSK_ImplicitInstantiation:
7182       return GVA_TemplateInstantiation;
7183     }
7184   }
7185 
7186   llvm_unreachable("Invalid Linkage!");
7187 }
7188 
7189 bool ASTContext::DeclMustBeEmitted(const Decl *D) {
7190   if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) {
7191     if (!VD->isFileVarDecl())
7192       return false;
7193   } else if (!isa<FunctionDecl>(D))
7194     return false;
7195 
7196   // Weak references don't produce any output by themselves.
7197   if (D->hasAttr<WeakRefAttr>())
7198     return false;
7199 
7200   // Aliases and used decls are required.
7201   if (D->hasAttr<AliasAttr>() || D->hasAttr<UsedAttr>())
7202     return true;
7203 
7204   if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) {
7205     // Forward declarations aren't required.
7206     if (!FD->doesThisDeclarationHaveABody())
7207       return FD->doesDeclarationForceExternallyVisibleDefinition();
7208 
7209     // Constructors and destructors are required.
7210     if (FD->hasAttr<ConstructorAttr>() || FD->hasAttr<DestructorAttr>())
7211       return true;
7212 
7213     // The key function for a class is required.
7214     if (const CXXMethodDecl *MD = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(FD)) {
7215       const CXXRecordDecl *RD = MD->getParent();
7216       if (MD->isOutOfLine() && RD->isDynamicClass()) {
7217         const CXXMethodDecl *KeyFunc = getKeyFunction(RD);
7218         if (KeyFunc && KeyFunc->getCanonicalDecl() == MD->getCanonicalDecl())
7219           return true;
7220       }
7221     }
7222 
7223     GVALinkage Linkage = GetGVALinkageForFunction(FD);
7224 
7225     // static, static inline, always_inline, and extern inline functions can
7226     // always be deferred.  Normal inline functions can be deferred in C99/C++.
7227     // Implicit template instantiations can also be deferred in C++.
7228     if (Linkage == GVA_Internal  || Linkage == GVA_C99Inline ||
7229         Linkage == GVA_CXXInline || Linkage == GVA_TemplateInstantiation)
7230       return false;
7231     return true;
7232   }
7233 
7234   const VarDecl *VD = cast<VarDecl>(D);
7235   assert(VD->isFileVarDecl() && "Expected file scoped var");
7236 
7237   if (VD->isThisDeclarationADefinition() == VarDecl::DeclarationOnly)
7238     return false;
7239 
7240   // Structs that have non-trivial constructors or destructors are required.
7241 
7242   // FIXME: Handle references.
7243   // FIXME: Be more selective about which constructors we care about.
7244   if (const RecordType *RT = VD->getType()->getAs<RecordType>()) {
7245     if (const CXXRecordDecl *RD = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(RT->getDecl())) {
7246       if (RD->hasDefinition() && !(RD->hasTrivialDefaultConstructor() &&
7247                                    RD->hasTrivialCopyConstructor() &&
7248                                    RD->hasTrivialMoveConstructor() &&
7249                                    RD->hasTrivialDestructor()))
7250         return true;
7251     }
7252   }
7253 
7254   GVALinkage L = GetGVALinkageForVariable(VD);
7255   if (L == GVA_Internal || L == GVA_TemplateInstantiation) {
7256     if (!(VD->getInit() && VD->getInit()->HasSideEffects(*this)))
7257       return false;
7258   }
7259 
7260   return true;
7261 }
7262 
7263 CallingConv ASTContext::getDefaultCXXMethodCallConv(bool isVariadic) {
7264   // Pass through to the C++ ABI object
7265   return ABI->getDefaultMethodCallConv(isVariadic);
7266 }
7267 
7268 CallingConv ASTContext::getCanonicalCallConv(CallingConv CC) const {
7269   if (CC == CC_C && !LangOpts.MRTD && getTargetInfo().getCXXABI() != CXXABI_Microsoft)
7270     return CC_Default;
7271   return CC;
7272 }
7273 
7274 bool ASTContext::isNearlyEmpty(const CXXRecordDecl *RD) const {
7275   // Pass through to the C++ ABI object
7276   return ABI->isNearlyEmpty(RD);
7277 }
7278 
7279 MangleContext *ASTContext::createMangleContext() {
7280   switch (Target->getCXXABI()) {
7281   case CXXABI_ARM:
7282   case CXXABI_Itanium:
7283     return createItaniumMangleContext(*this, getDiagnostics());
7284   case CXXABI_Microsoft:
7285     return createMicrosoftMangleContext(*this, getDiagnostics());
7286   }
7287   llvm_unreachable("Unsupported ABI");
7288 }
7289 
7290 CXXABI::~CXXABI() {}
7291 
7292 size_t ASTContext::getSideTableAllocatedMemory() const {
7293   return ASTRecordLayouts.getMemorySize()
7294     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ObjCLayouts)
7295     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(KeyFunctions)
7296     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ObjCImpls)
7297     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(BlockVarCopyInits)
7298     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(DeclAttrs)
7299     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember)
7300     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUsingDecl)
7301     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl)
7302     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl)
7303     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(OverriddenMethods)
7304     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(Types)
7305     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(VariableArrayTypes)
7306     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ClassScopeSpecializationPattern);
7307 }
7308 
7309 unsigned ASTContext::getLambdaManglingNumber(CXXMethodDecl *CallOperator) {
7310   CXXRecordDecl *Lambda = CallOperator->getParent();
7311   return LambdaMangleContexts[Lambda->getDeclContext()]
7312            .getManglingNumber(CallOperator);
7313 }
7314 
7315 
7316 void ASTContext::setParameterIndex(const ParmVarDecl *D, unsigned int index) {
7317   ParamIndices[D] = index;
7318 }
7319 
7320 unsigned ASTContext::getParameterIndex(const ParmVarDecl *D) const {
7321   ParameterIndexTable::const_iterator I = ParamIndices.find(D);
7322   assert(I != ParamIndices.end() &&
7323          "ParmIndices lacks entry set by ParmVarDecl");
7324   return I->second;
7325 }
7326